Continental Automotive Systems UHI-5100 Bluetooth Handsfree Car Kit with HFP User Manual

Continental Automotive Systems, Inc. Bluetooth Handsfree Car Kit with HFP

UserManual.wiki >

Continental Automotive Systems >

UHI 5100 User Manual HTML Version

User Manual

Control systems

COMAND operating safety

COMAND introduction

COMAND FM/AM radio

COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)

COMAND

audio CD/audio DVD/MP3

COMAND video DVD (USA only)

COMAND telephone*

COMAND navigation

COMAND address book

COMAND system settings

COMAND vehicle menu

COMAND automatic climate control

COMAND seats

Instrument cluster control system

Voice Control*

Control systems

COMAND operating safety

Warning! G

Any alteration of electronic components or

software can cause malfunctions.

Radio, satellite radio* (USA only), amplifier,

CD/DVD changer, navigation module, tele-

phone and Voice Control Systems* are in-

terconnected. Therefore, if one of the

components is not operational, or has not

been removed/ replaced properly, the func-

tion of other components could be impaired.

Such conditions might seriously impair the

operating safety of your vehicle.

We recommend to have any service work on

electronic components carried out by an au-

thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warning! G

In order to avoid distraction which could

lead to an accident, the driver should enter

system settings while the vehicle is at a

standstill, and operate the system only

when permitted by road, weather and traffic

conditions.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/ h), your car covers a

distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) ev-

ery second.

COMAND supplies you with information to

help you select your route more easily and

guide you conveniently and safely to your

destination. For safety reasons, we encour-

age the driver to stop the vehicle in a safe

place before answering or placing a call, or

consulting the COMAND screen to read nav-

igational maps, instructions, or downloaded

information.

Warning! G

While the navigation system provides direc-

tional assistance, the driver must remain fo-

cused on safe driving behavior, especially

attention to traffic and street signs, and

should utilize the system’s audio cues while

driving.

The navigation system does not supply any

information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic

regulations or traffic safety rules. Their ob-

servance always remains in the driver’s per-

sonal responsibility. DVD maps do not cover

all areas nor all routes within an area.

Control systems

COMAND introduction

왔COMAND introduction

COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data

System) is an information and operating

center for vehicle sound and communica-

tions systems, including the radio and nav-

igation system, as well as other optional

equipment (satellite radio*, telephone*,

etc.).

Availability of functions while the vehi-

cle is in motion

For safety reasons, certain COMAND func-

tions are not available while the vehicle is

in motion or they are only available to a

limited extent. You will notice this, for ex-

ample, by the fact that certain menu items

cannot be selected or that the COMAND

display shows a corresponding message.

Switching COMAND on or off

왘Press the o shortcut button in the

center console (컄page 86).

COMAND calls up the menu last select-

ed.

COMAND components

In your vehicle, COMAND can be used to

operate:

앫audio functions

앫the navigation system

앫the telephone* and communication

functions (SMS*)

앫Video DVD (USA only)

앫various vehicle settings

COMAND consists of the following:

앫COMAND shortcut buttons

앫COMAND display

앫telephone* keypad

앫COMAND controller

iWhen you switch off COMAND, you also

switch off the currently playing audio source.

During a telephone call, you cannot switch off

COMAND.

Control systems

COMAND introduction

COMAND shortcut buttons

Use the COMAND shortcut buttons to se-

lect main functions directly.

Example:

왘Switching directly to Radio or CD

menu: Press M once or twice.

COMAND display

In the COMAND display, you will find the

function currently selected and the corre-

sponding menus. The COMAND display is

divided into several areas.

1Status line

2Main functions

3Main area

4Submenus

5Climate control settings

A white bar under the main functions 2 in-

dicates the active area.

Once you have selected a main

function 2, the main area 3 is active.

iDuring Dynamic Rear View Monitor* opera-

tion (컄page 453) it is not possible to operate

the COMAND shortcut buttons.

Function Page

1PFavorite button 240

2MShortcut button for:

앫CD/DVD

앫radio

120

101

3LBack button 94

4OSeat menu 261

5NShortcut button for:

앫telephone*

앫navigation

132

167

6oCOMAND on/off

button

7,Volume control 96

8FMute button 96

Control systems

COMAND introduction

Instrument cluster multifunction

display

This section describes features and con-

trols via the COMAND controller, display

and shortcut buttons only.

Please refer to the “Instrument cluster

control system” section of this manual

(컄page 266) for function descriptions and

operation of the instrument cluster multi-

function display and multifunction steering

wheel buttons as they relate to COMAND

features described in this section.

Adjusting COMAND display

illumination

1Knob

왘Brightening illumination: Turn

knob 1 clockwise.

왘Dimming illumination: Turn knob 1

counterclockwise.

Swiveling COMAND display

1Button for swiveling display to the left

2Button for swiveling display to the right

You can swivel the COMAND display to the

left or right. The buttons are on the

right-hand side of the instrument cluster.

iThe layout of the menus may vary depending

on your vehicle’s equipment. This manual shows

the menus for a fully equipped vehicle.

Control systems

COMAND introduction

Telephone keypad*

With the help of the telephone keypad, you

can use your mobile phone if it is inserted

in the cradle.

1Telephone keypad

2Folding cover

COMAND controller

Use the COMAND controller to select

menu functions shown on the COMAND

display.

1COMAND controller

You can operate the COMAND controller

as follows:

앫press briefly or press and hold

앫rotate to the left or right

앫slide to the left, right, up, down or

diagonally

In this way, you can move through the

menus, select menu items or exit menus.

You can move through the menus either by

rotating or sliding the controller.

Operating COMAND controller

Control systems

COMAND introduction

Symbol How to use the COMAND controller Function

n왘Press briefly. 앫Select menu item.

앫Exit full-screen image with Navi.

왘Press and hold until the selected ac-

tion has been carried out.

앫Save a station.

앫Accept a destination for navigation.

ymz왘Rotate. 앫Move through vertical or horizontal menus.

앫Move through text.

앫Program settings.

qmr왘Slide. 앫Move through vertical menus.

앫Exit horizontal menus.

왘Slide and hold. 앫Move through a navigation map.

omp왘Slide. 앫Move through horizontal menus.

앫Exit vertical menus.

왘Slide and hold. 앫Fast forward or reverse for audio CD or audio DVD playback.

앫Move through a navigation map.

wmx왘Slide and hold. 앫Move through a navigation map.

Control systems

COMAND introduction

Operating COMAND

Menu overview

The illustration below shows the structure

of the main functions and their main

menus.

Each main function has a main menu. Each

menu item in the main menu in turn has

several submenu items.

Navi Page Audio Page Telephone* Page

Commands/menus

Map Display 169 FM/AM Radio 100 Telephone* 132

Mode 172 Sat Radio* (USA only) 105 Address Book* 226

CD 112 Telephone OFF* 134

DVD-Audio 112

MP3 112

Audio OFF 99

Control systems

COMAND introduction

Video DVD (USA only)1

1Depending on your vehicle’s production date the video DVD function may be not available.

Page Vehicle Page

Commands/menus

Video DVD 124 Exterior Lighting Delayed Switch-off 244

Submenu overview 126 Locator Lighting 245

Switching to video DVD mode 126 Exterior Mirror Convenience Settings 246

Pause playback 128 Automatic Locking 247

DVD menu 129 Easy Entry/Exit Feature 248

Interior Lighting Delayed Switch-off 250

Interior Ambient Light 249

Rear Window Sunshade* 251

Trunk Opening-height Restriction* 251

Control systems

COMAND introduction

Calling up the main menu

Illustration: audio main menu

You can call up the main menu of a main

function in the following manner:

왘Moving to the main function line:

Slide qm.

왘Selecting a main function: Slide omp

or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

Vertical menus

왘Moving through the menu:

Slide rmq or rotate ymz.

왘Selecting a menu item: Press n.

왘Exiting a menu without making a se-

lection: Slide ompin the opposite di-

rection of the list orientation or press

back button L.

Horizontal menus

왘Moving through the menu:

Slide omp or rotate ymz.

왘Selecting a menu item: Press n.

왘Exiting a menu without making a se-

lection: Slide rmqin the opposite di-

rection of the list orientation or press

back button L.

Control systems

COMAND introduction

Entering characters

Illustration: entering a navigation destina-

tion

Selecting characters

왘Slide omp or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

COMAND completes your entry as

soon as it can be clearly identified. In

this case, you do not need to switch to

the list.

Deleting individual characters

왘Select and press ) repeatedly in the

bottom line.

Deleting entire words or numbers

왘Press and hold ) in the bottom line

until the word or number is deleted.

Exiting character entry

왘Select and press “Back” in the bottom

line.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

Switching to the list

왘Slide qm.

왘Select and press ? in the second line

from the bottom.

왘Exiting list: Slide om to select “Back”.

Accepting first entry

왘Press n until you exit the character

entry window.

Selecting list item

Illustration: list of towns and cities for navi-

gation

1Symbol for other selection options

(e.g. county)

왘Selecting a line: Slide rmq or

rotate ymz.컄컄

Control systems

COMAND introduction

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

Additional selection options are avail-

able for list entries featuring

symbol 1. For example, cities marked

with symbol 1 indicate that the select-

ed country has more than one city fea-

turing that name. Confirming such a list

entry opens up another submenu.

Back button

1Back button

왘Switching to the next highest menu:

Press L briefly.

COMAND switches to the next highest

menu level within the currently active

operating mode.

왘Switching to the main menu: Press

and hold L.

You will hear a signal, and COMAND

switches to the main menu of the cur-

rently active operating mode.

Example of how to use COMAND

In the descriptions below, the main func-

tions always serve as the starting point for

locating the individual menu items.

Example:

“Audio”  “Audio”  “FM/AM Radio” 

“Radio”  “Save Station”

If you already see one of the submenus on

the screen (e.g. the “Audio”  “Audio” 

“Radio” submenu), it is not necessary to

perform the first steps.

The individual steps for the above-men-

tioned example are described below.

왘Switching to the main function line:

Slide qm.

왘Selecting “Audio” main function:

Slide ompor rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

The audio operating mode last selected

appears.

iIn the COMAND display, you will see the

submenu previously called up for each main

menu.

컄컄

Control systems

COMAND introduction

왘Selecting “Audio” in the main menu:

Slide qm.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

A selection list with the functions of the

“Audio” main menu appears.

왘Selecting “FM/AM Radio”:

Slide qmor rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

The FM/AM Radio menu appears.

왘Selecting “Radio”: Slide mror

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

The Radio submenu appears.

왘Select “Save Station” from selection

list by rotating ymz or sliding rmq.

왘Select desired position.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

The selected station is saved at the

designated position. The display

switches back to the Radio display.

Control systems

COMAND introduction

Main menus of COMAND

Sound

왘Muting: Press the F shortcut but-

ton in the center console (컄page 86).

The sound of the current audio source

is switched on or is muted.

Switching off navigation announce-

ments entirely

왘Canceling navigation message:

Briefly press F shortcut button dur-

ing an announcement.

왘Switching off navigation messages:

Press and hold F during an an-

nouncement until the announcement is

switched off.

You will see the message “The driving

instructions have been muted.” for a

short while.

Adjusting volume

1Thumbwheel

왘Adjusting: Turn , thumbwheel.

The volume of the currently selected

audio source changes.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

iWhen the sound is muted, you will see the

symbol F in the status line. When you

change the audio source, the sound is automati-

cally switched on. You will be able to hear an-

nouncements from the navigation system even

when the sound is muted.

iThe announcements remain switched off

even if you start a new route guidance or if

COMAND is switched off/on with the o but-

ton.

If you switch COMAND off by removing the

SmartKey from the starter switch and then

switch the ignition back on after more than

3 minutes, the announcements are automatical-

ly switched back on.

Control systems

COMAND introduction

Volume of navigation announcements

You can adjust the volume of the naviga-

tion announcements independently from

the volume of the respective audio source.

During a navigation announcement:

왘turn thumbwheel ,

왘press æ or ç on the multifunc-

tion steering wheel.

Adjusting volume for telephone calls

In hands-free mode, you can adjust the vol-

ume of a telephone call while the call is

currently active.

During a telephone call:

왘turn thumbwheel ,

왘press æ or ç on the multifunc-

tion steering wheel.

Selecting sound settings

You can select different sound settings for

each individual audio source. The respec-

tive sound menu can be found via the sub-

menu for which you wish to make settings.

Example:

“Audio”  “Audio”  “FM/AM Radio” 

“Sound”

Adjusting treble or bass

왘Select “Sound”  “Treble” or “Bass”.

The setting last selected is indicated by

an outlined bar.

Adjusting treble and bass

1Setting last selected

2Current setting

왘Changing setting: Slide rmq or

rotate ymz until desired treble or bass

setting is reached.

왘Exiting menu: Press n, L or

slide omp.

The setting is saved.

Control systems

COMAND introduction

Adjusting balance or fader

Balance is used to determine whether the

sound focus should be shifted toward the

driver’s side or the passenger’s side.

Fader is used to determine whether the

sound focus should be shifted toward the

front or rear of the vehicle

왘Select “Sound”  “Balance/Fader”.

The setting last selected is indicated by

an outlined bar.

Adjusting balance and fader

1Current setting indicated by orange

cross-hair symbol

왘Changing setting: Slide rmq or omp

until desired balance/fader setting is

reached.

왘Exiting menu: Press n or L.

The setting is saved.

Surround sound

With surround sound, you can choose be-

tween “LOGIC7® ON” and “LOGIC7® OFF”.

Harman/kardon LOGIC7® surround sound

is available for the following operating

modes:

앫Audio DVD (MLP, DTS, PCM, and Dolby

Digital audio formats)

앫Video DVD (DTS, PCM, and Dolby Digi-

tal audio formats) (USA only)

앫Audio CD

앫MP3

앫Radio (FM, AM, WB,

Satellite* (USA only))

앫PCMCIA

iSince some DVDs contain both stereo as

well as multi-channel audio formats, it may be

necessary to adapt the audio format

(컄page 123).

iThe “LOGIC7® ON” function of the har-

man/kardon LOGIC7® surround sound system

makes it possible to play discrete 5.1 and stereo

recordings with optimal surround sound for ev-

ery passenger. Music on CDs or audio DVDs with

high-resolution surround formats such as MLP,

DTS or Dolby Digital is played back optimally.

For an ideal sound experience on all seats,

LOGIC7® distributes 5.1 surround information

via the 13-channel system architecture. The re-

sult is a sound as intended by the sound engi-

neers during the original recording.

harman/kardon LOGIC7® converts all two-chan-

nel stereo sound material into multi-channel sur-

round sound. With the help of LOGIC7®,

surround information stored during the original

recording are read out and distributed through

the 13 channels. No effects are created during

this process; only that which was already there

becomes audible.

In addition, harman/kardon LOGIC7® moves the

perceived sound source away from the individual

loudspeakers, thus generating a natural 360°

sound experience for every passenger.

Control systems

COMAND introduction

Adjusting surround sound

With surround sound, you can choose be-

tween “LOGIC7® ON” and “LOGIC7® OFF”.

왘Select “Sound”  “3D Sound”.

Adjusting surround sound

1Current setting

왘Selecting a setting: Slide rmq or

rotate ymz.

왘Saving setting: Press n.

The setting is saved and the menu is

closed.

왘Exiting menu without saving

changes: Press L or slide omp.

Switching off/on the audio source

왘Switching off: Select “Audio”  “Au-

dio”  “Audio OFF”.

The audio source is switched off; “Au-

dio OFF” appears in the display.

왘Switching on: Select “Audio”, then the

desired audio source.

왘Load CD/DVD (컄page 115) or a

PCMCIA card (컄page 117).

iBy selecting “LOGIC7® OFF”, all compatible

formats as they are present on the medium are

played back. Due to the vehicle’s spatial charac-

teristics, an optimal sound experience is not en-

sured on all seats.

iPlease note the following:

앫For an ideal sound experience at all seats,

the balance and fader should be adjusted to

the center of the passenger compartment

with LOGIC7® switched on.

앫The best sound results are achieved by play-

ing high-quality audio CDs and audio DVDs.

앫For MP3 tracks, the bit rate should be at

least 128 kbit/s.

앫Surround sound does not function for

mono-signal sources.

앫In the event of poor radio reception quality,

e.g. inside a tunnel, you should switch off

LOGIC7®, as a dynamic switch from Stereo

to Mono could occur, resulting in temporary

sound distortion.

앫With some stereo recordings, the resulting

sound may deviate from conventional stereo

playback.

iWhen you insert an audio CD or audio DVD,

it automatically becomes the active audio

source.

100

Control systems

COMAND FM/AM radio

Submenu overview

Warning! G

Please devote your attention first and fore-

most to the traffic situation you are in.

Before your journey, please familiarize your-

self with the radio functions.

Only use the COMAND when road and traffic

conditions permit you to do so. Otherwise

you could be involved in an accident in

which you or others could be injured.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

Radio

(except Weather Band)

Presets

(except Weather Band)

Channel

(only Weather Band)

FM or AM or WB Sound

Station List

(in FM waveband only)

Autostore Channel list Switch to FM waveband Treble

Save Station Preset station list Switch to AM waveband Bass

Frequency Entry Switch to Weather Band Balance/Fader

Show Station Info

(in FM waveband only)

3D Sound

101

Control systems

COMAND FM/AM radio

Switching to radio mode

왘Select “Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM

Radio”.

왘Press the M shortcut button once or

twice.

The radio display appears once you

have switched to radio mode. You will

hear the station/channel last tuned in

in the previously selected waveband,

provided that the station/channel can

be received.

Illustration: radio mode in FM waveband

1Main area with frequency display

2Preset position of selected station

3Frequency of selected station

4Name of selected station

5Sound settings

6To switch to Weather Band

7To switch to AM waveband

8Selected waveband

9Preset options

aRadio options

Switching wavebands

You can switch between the FM, AM and

WB (Weather Band) wavebands.

왘Select “Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM

Radio” “FM” or “AM” or “WB”.

You will hear the station last tuned in

on the selected waveband.

Selecting stations/channels

You have the following selection options:

앫The station list

앫The search function

앫The station presets

앫The manual frequency entry

앫The channel list

iThe number of times you have to press the

M shortcut button depends on the operating

mode currently selected.

iStation name display 4 is available for the

FM waveband and can only be seen when it is

switched on (컄page 104) and if the station

transmits a name.

102

Control systems

COMAND FM/AM radio

Selecting stations using the station list

왘Select “Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM

Radio” “FM”.

왘Select “Radio” “Station List”.

The station list appears. The dot R in

front of a list entry indicates the cur-

rently selected station. A number in

front of the list entry indicates the pre-

set position in the station preset mem-

ory.

왘Select a station by rotating ymz or

sliding qmr and press n.

Selecting stations/channels using the

search function

왘Slide omp or rotate ymz when the

main area is selected.

Depending on the direction in which

the controller is being slid or rotated,

the system searches upward or down-

ward and stops at the next receivable

station/channel.

Selecting stations using station

presets

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “FM/AM

Radio”  “FM” or “AM”.

왘Select “Presets”.

왘Press n when the main area is select-

ed.

The preset menu appears. The dot R

in front of a preset position indicates

that the currently selected station is

saved there.

왘Select station preset by rotating ymz

or sliding qmr and press n.

Selecting stations by entering the fre-

quency manually

왘Select “Audio”“Audio”“FM/AM

Radio”“FM” or “AM”.

왘Select “Radio”“Frequency Entry”.

The menu for manual frequency entry

appears.

왘Exiting menu without making an

entry: Press L back button in the

center console (컄page 86).

왘Increasing or decreasing number:

Slide qmr or rotate ymz.

왘Selecting the next number:

Slide mp.

왘Confirming frequency entry:

Press n.

COMAND tunes in to the frequency

entered.

iThe station list is only available for the FM

waveband. It contains all the stations that can be

currently received and is sorted by station fre-

quencies.

iThis function is not available for Weather

Band.

iThis function is not available for Weather

Band.

iYou can only select currently permitted

numbers.

103

Control systems

COMAND FM/AM radio

Selecting channels using the channel

list

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “FM/AM

Radio”  “WB”  “Channel”.

왘Press n when the main area is select-

ed.

The channel list appears. The dot R in

front of a list entry indicates the cur-

rently selected channel.

왘Select channel by rotating ymz or

sliding qmr and press n.

Saving stations

You have the following options:

앫Saving stations manually

앫Saving stations using Autostore

Saving stations manually

Option 1

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “FM/AM

Radio”  “FM” or “AM”.

왘Select “Radio ” “Save Station”.

Option 2

왘Press n when the main area is select-

ed.

Option 3

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “FM/AM

Radio”  “FM” or “AM”.

왘Select “Presets”.

All three of these will call up a station pre-

set screen. The dot R in front of a preset

position indicates that the currently select-

ed station is saved there.

왘Selecting a preset position:

Slide qmr or rotate ymz.

Saving a station to a selected preset po-

sition

If you have called up the station preset

screen using option 1:

왘Press n briefly.

In options 2 and 3:

iIf you enter a frequency in the AM waveband

which is outside the frequency range, COMAND

tunes in to the next lowest frequency.

iThis function is only available for Weather

Band.

iTwenty stations can be saved in each wave-

band except for Weather Band.

104

Control systems

COMAND FM/AM radio

왘Press and hold n until you hear a sig-

nal.

The station is saved.

Saving using autostore

Option 1

왘Press n when the main area is select-

ed.

왘Select “Autostore”.

Option 2

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “FM/AM

Radio”  “FM” or “AM”.

왘Select “Presets”  “Autostore”.

Option 3

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “FM/AM

Radio”  “Radio”  “Save Station” 

“Autostore”.

Station name display

1Station name display

왘Switching the station name display

on/off: Select “Audio”  “Audio” 

“FM/AM Radio”  “FM”  “Radio” 

“Show Station Info”.

The display is switched on or off, de-

pending on the previous setting. When

the display is switched on, a check-

mark appears in front of the

“Show Station Info” menu item.

iThis function is not available for Weather

Band. The Autostore function saves receivable

stations as presets in order of their reception

quality. All stations saved manually in the preset

memory will be lost if COMAND finds 20 sta-

tions. If COMAND finds less than 20 stations, for

example 9, then the stations saved in preset po-

sitions 1 – 9 will be over written.

iIn the FM waveband, COMAND can show

the name of the station currently tuned in. Sta-

tion name display 1 can only be seen when it is

switched on and if the station transmits a name.

105

Control systems

COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)

왔COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)

Submenu overview

Warning! G

Please devote your attention first and fore-

most to the traffic situation you are in.

Before your journey, please familiarize your-

self with the radio functions.

Only use the COMAND when road and traffic

conditions permit you to do so. Otherwise

you could be involved in an accident in

which you or others could be injured.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

Sat Radio Presets Info Category Sound

Channel List Station presets Show program info Select category Treble

Save Channel Bass

Channel Entry Balance/Fader

Service 3D Sound

106

Control systems

COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)

Introduction to Satellite radio

SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides 100 chan-

nels, so called streams, of digital-quality

radio, among others music, sports, news,

and entertainment free of commercials.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio uses a fleet of

high-power satellites to broadcast

24 hours per day, coast-to-coast, in the

contiguous US.

This diverse, satellite-delivered program-

ming is available for a monthly subscrip-

tion fee.

For more information and service availabil-

ity call the SIRIUS Service Center

(컄page 111), or go to

www.siriusradio.com.

Switching to satellite radio

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “Sat Ra-

dio”.

왘Press the M shortcut button once or

twice. The Satellite radio menu appears

if it was the last active radio mode.

The screen which then appears de-

pends on the activation status of the

satellite radio service.

The following options are possible:

앫Satellite radio service is not activat-

앫Only the preview channel is activat-

앫Satellite radio service is fully acti-

vated

iA subscription to SIRIUS satellite radio ser-

vice provider is required for the satellite radio op-

eration described in this chapter. Contact an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details

and availability for your vehicle.

iSatellite radio service may be unavailable or

interrupted from time to time for a variety of rea-

sons, such as environmental or topographic con-

ditions and other things we can’t control. Service

might also not be available in certain places

(e.g., in tunnels, parking garages, or within or

next to buildings) or near other technologies. In

such situations, the satellite radio’s main menu

shows the “Acquiring signal...” screen. At this

point, the radio’s functions are restricted to

manual channel number entry (컄page 109) and

service info display (컄page 111).

107

Control systems

COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)

Satellite radio service is not activated

The telephone number of the SIRIUS Ser-

vice Center and the twelve-digit electronic

serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the particular

receiver are displayed.

This information is required when calling

the SIRIUS Service Center for an activation

request.

왘Closing screen: Press n.

Only the preview channel is activated

The satellite radio preview channel ap-

pears.

Satellite radio service is fully activated

The main satellite radio menu appears. You

will hear the channel last tuned in, provid-

ed that it can be received.

Main satellite radio menu

1Main area with channel display

2Preset position of selected channel

3Selected channel

4Selected program category

5Sound settings

6To select program category

7Channel number of selected channel

8Other channel information

9Preset options

aSatellite radio options

iCredit card information is also required for

your application. The activation process takes

approximately 5 to 10 minutes after calling the

SIRIUS Service Center.

iIf only the preview channel is activated, you

cannot tune in another channel. If you try to do

this, you will see the screen described in the sec-

tion “Satellite radio service is not activated”

(컄page 107).

108

Control systems

COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)

Selecting program category

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “Sat Ra-

dio”  “Category”.

The category list appears.

왘Select category by rotating ymz or

sliding qmr and press n.

When selecting a channel using the

channel search function or the channel

list, you have access to the channels

you subscribe to and which are includ-

ed in the selected category.

Tuning in channels

You have the following selection options:

앫The channel search function

앫The channel presets

앫The manual channel number entry

앫The channel list

Tuning in channels using channel

search function

왘Slide omp or rotate ymz when the

main area is selected.

Depending on the direction in which

the controller is being pressed or rotat-

ed, the system searches upward or

downward and stops at the next receiv-

able channel.

Tuning in channels using channel

presets

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “Sat Ra-

dio”  “Presets”.

iMain area 1 can show all channels includ-

ed in your subscription. Which channels are

shown depends on the selected program catego-

ry 4.

Note that categories and channels shown in illus-

trations are dependent on programming content

delivered by the service provider. Programming

content is subject to change.

Therefore, channel and categories shown in illus-

trations and descriptions contained in this man-

ual may differ from the channels and categories

delivered by the service provider.

iThe channels are categorized. Categories al-

low you to tune to stations broadcasting a cer-

tain type of program.

iIf only the preview channel is activated, only

certain categories are available on the list. Which

categories these are depend on the service pro-

vider.

iWhen you select the category “All Chan-

nels”, you have access to all the channels you

subscribe to, regardless of category, when you

are tuning in a channel using the channel search

function or the channel list.

iThis function is not possible when only the

preview channel is activated. If you try to tune in

a channel in this instance, you will see the

screen described in the section “Satellite radio

service is not activated” (컄page 107).

iWhich channels are found by the channel

search function depends on which channels you

have subscribed to and the program category

you have selected (컄page 108).

109

Control systems

COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)

왘Press n when the main area is select-

ed.

The preset menu appears. The dot R

in front of a preset position indicates

that this is the channel currently select-

ed and being listened to.

왘Select station preset and briefly

press n.

COMAND tunes in the corresponding

channel as long as it is included in your

subscription and is still available.

If the channel is not included in your

subscription, you will see the message

described in the section “Satellite radio

service is not activated” (컄page 107).

If the channel is no longer available or

only the preview channel is activated,

you will see the message “Invalid Chan-

nel”.

왘Closing message: Press n.

Tuning in channels using manual chan-

nel number entry

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “Sat Ra-

dio”  “Sat Radio”  “Channel Entry”.

The menu for manual channel number

entry appears.

왘Exiting menu without making an

entry: Press L back button in the

center console (컄page 86).

왘Increase or decreasing number:

Slide qmr or rotate ymz.

왘Selecting next number: Slide omp.

왘Confirming channel entry: Press n.

Further operation depends on whether

the selected channel number is valid or

if the channel is included in your sub-

scription.

Channel number is valid and channel is

included in subscription

COMAND tunes in the channel entered.

Channel number is invalid

You will see the message “Invalid Chan-

nel”.

왘Closing message: Press n.

Channel number is valid but channel is

not included in subscription

You will see the screen described in the

section “Satellite radio service is not acti-

vated” (컄page 107).

왘Closing display: Press n.

iThis function is not possible when only the

preview channel is activated. If you try to tune in

a channel in this instance, you will see the

screen described in the section “Satellite radio

service is not activated” (컄page 107).

110

Control systems

COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)

Tuning in channels using the channel

list

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “Sat Ra-

dio”  “Sat Radio”  “Channel List”.

The channel list appears. The dot R in

front of a list entry indicates the cur-

rently selected channel.

왘Select channel by rotating ymz or

sliding qmr and press n.

Saving channels

Option 1

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “Sat Ra-

dio”  “Sat Radio”  “Save Channel”.

Option 2

왘Press n when the main area is select-

ed.

Option 3

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “Sat Ra-

dio”  “Presets”.

All three of these will call up a preset

menu. The dot R in front of a preset posi-

tion indicates that this is the channel cur-

rently selected and being listened to.

왘Selecting a preset position:

Slide qmr or rotate ymz.

Saving a channel to a selected preset

position

If you have called up the channel preset

screen using option 1:

왘Press n briefly.

In options 2 and 3:

왘Press and hold n until you hear a sig-

nal.

The channel is saved.

iThe contents of the channel list depends on

which channels are included in your subscription

and which program category you have selected

(컄page 108). If only the preview channel is acti-

vated, the channel list contains only the preview

channel.

iThere are twenty preset positions available.

111

Control systems

COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)

Show program info

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “Sat Ra-

dio”  “Info”.

You will see a screen that may contain the

following information:

앫Selected program category

앫Selected channel

앫Artist of the track currently being

played

앫Name of current track

왘Closing screen: Slide omp or

press n.

Channel update

The service provider may conduct a chan-

nel update.

During the update, the message “Updating

channels...” will appear on the display.

No functions can be operated in satellite

radio mode during the update.

Calling SIRIUS Service Center

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “Sat Ra-

dio”  “Sat Radio”  “Service”.

The telephone number of the SIRIUS

Service Center and the twelve-digit

electronic serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of

the particular receiver are displayed.

왘Closing screen: Slide omp or

press n.

iIf the program provider does not offer any in-

formation, the “Info” menu item cannot be se-

lected.

iThe program provider determines what in-

formation is displayed on the screen. COMAND

shows no more than two lines per item of infor-

mation. If an item of information is too long,

COMAND shortens it.

iIt may be necessary to call the SIRIUS Ser-

vice Center if, for example:

앫You want to cancel the subscription or

re-subscribe at a later date.

앫You forget to pay the bill.

앫You sell the car to another person.

112

Control systems

COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3

Safety precautions

Notes about MP3 mode

Permissible media for MP3 files

앫CD-R and CD-RW

앫DVD-R and DVD-RW

앫PCMCIA card (컄page 117)

Permissible file systems

앫ISO9660/Joliet for CDs

앫UDF for DVDs

앫FAT16 or FAT32 for PCMCIA cards with

storage medium

Multisession CDs

For multisession CDs, the first session

type of the CD determines how COMAND

will process the CD.

For example, if the first session type is ac-

cording to the audio CD standard and the

second session type is according to the

data CD standard containing MP3 tracks,

COMAND will treat the CD as a conven-

tional audio CD. This means that it is only

possible to access the audio CD tracks.

Access to the MP3 tracks is not possible.

Similarly, if the first session type is accord-

ing to the data CD standard containing

MP3 tracks and the second session type is

according to the audio CD standard,

COMAND will treat the CD as a data CD.

Warning! G

COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser

product. You must not open the casing.

There is a risk of exposure to invisible laser

radiation if you open the casing, or if the

casing is faulty or damaged.

COMAND does not contain any parts that

you are able to maintain yourself. For safety

reasons, all maintenance work must be car-

ried out by qualified technicians.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-

ly 14 m) every second.

Warning! G

Only carry out the following when the vehi-

cle is stationary:

앫Inserting a disc

앫Ejecting a disc

There is a risk of accident by being distract-

ed from road and traffic conditions if you

load a CD/DVD while the vehicle is in mo-

tion.

113

Control systems

COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3

This means that it is only possible to ac-

cess the MP3 tracks. Access to the audio

CD tracks is not possible.

File structure on a disc

When you create an MP3 disc, the MP3

tracks can be organized in folders. A folder

can also contain other folders. A disc can

contain a maximum of 255 folders. Each

folder can contain a maximum of

255 tracks and 255 folders. A disc can

contain a maximum of 4000 tracks. Usual-

ly this number will not be reached because

each minute of an MP3 track requires ap-

proximately 1 MB of storage space.

Track and folder names

When you create an MP3 disc, you can as-

sign names to the MP3 tracks and folders.

COMAND uses these names for the corre-

sponding display in MP3 mode. Empty fold-

ers or folders which contain data other

than MP3 tracks are not displayed by

COMAND.

If MP3 files are saved in the root directory

itself (uppermost directory on storage me-

dium), the root directory will also be treat-

ed as a folder. COMAND will then show the

name of the root directory as the folder

name.

You must observe the following when as-

signing track names:

앫Track names must have at least one

character.

앫Track names must have the extension

“mp3”.

앫There must be a period between the

track name and the extension.

Example of a correct track name:

Track1.mp3

COMAND is unable to recognize an MP3

track if:

앫there is no period between the track ti-

tle and the extension

앫there is no extension

Permissible MP3 formats

COMAND supports the MPEG1 Audio Lay-

er 3 format.

Permissible bit and sampling rates

앫Fixed and variable bit rates up to

320 kbit/s

앫Sampling rates of 24 kHz – 48 kHz

Notes on copyright

The music tracks that you create for MP3

mode and can play back in MP3 mode are

generally subject to copyright protection in

accordance with the applicable interna-

tional and national regulations.

iCOMAND does not support ID3 tags.

iThis format is generally known as “MP3”.

iOnly use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of at

least 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least

44.1 kHz. Smaller rates can cause a noticeable

deterioration in sound quality. This is especially

the case if you have activated a surround sound

function.

114

Control systems

COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3

In many countries, reproductions are not

permitted without the prior consent of the

Make sure that you know the applicable

with these.

If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for

your own compositions and recordings, or

the copyright holder has granted you per-

mission, these restrictions do not apply.

Notes about audio DVD operation

COMAND can playback commercially

available, prerecorded audio DVDs that

bear the following label. You will usually

find the label on the DVD booklet, the inlay,

or the DVD itself.

Data on audio DVDs are stored either in

uncompressed format or in lossless com-

pressed format. The sound quality on au-

dio DVDs is therefore better than on

recordable DVDs that contain MP3 data

because the MP3 format uses a lossy type

of compression.

You cannot delete data from or record

additional data to commercially available,

prerecorded audio DVDs.

Please note the following information

about CDs/DVDs and pay special atten-

tion to the notes on copied and/or

self-written CDs/DVDs.

Notes about CDs/DVDs

iAudio DVDs differ from recordable DVD-R

and DVD-RW discs.

iAudio CDs with copy protection are not

compatible with the CD audio standard and

therefore may not be able to be played by

COMAND.

There may be playback problems when playing

copied discs.

There is a large variety of discs, disc-writing soft-

ware and writers available. This variety means

that there is no guarantee that the system will be

able to play discs that you have written/copied

yourself.

There may be playback problems if you use CD-R

or CD-RW type discs you have copied yourself

with a storage capacity of more than 700 MB.

These CDs are not compatible with currently ap-

plicable standards.

115

Control systems

COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3

Notes about handling CDs/DVDs

앫Only hold discs by the edge.

앫Handle discs carefully to prevent play-

back problems.

앫Avoid getting scratches, fingerprints

and dust on discs.

앫Clean discs from time to time with a

commercially-available cleaning cloth.

Do not wipe them with a circular mo-

tion, but only in straight lines from the

center outwards.

앫Only use a pen designed for such a pur-

pose to label discs.

앫Place discs back in their boxes after

use.

앫Protect discs from heat and direct sun-

light.

Inserting CDs and DVDs

!Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.

These could peel away and damage COMAND.

COMAND is designed to hold discs which com-

ply with the IEC 60908 standard. You can there-

fore only use discs with a maximum thickness of

1.3 mm.

If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain

data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio

data on the other), they cannot be ejected and

can damage COMAND.

Do not use discs with an 8-cm diameter, even if

they have an adapter.

Only use round discs with a 12-cm diameter.

Warning! G

Only insert a CD or DVD when the vehicle is

stationary. There is a risk of accident by be-

ing distracted from road and traffic condi-

tions if you load a CD/DVD while the vehicle

is in motion.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-

ly 14 m) every second.

iIf the CD/DVD has a printed side, this must

face upwards when the CD/DVD is inserted. If

neither side is printed, the side to be played

should face downwards.

116

Control systems

COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3

Loading the CD/DVD changer

The CD/DVD changer can hold up to a to-

tal of 6 audio CDs or DVDs.

1Disc slot

2Load button (all magazine trays)

3Magazine tray buttons 1 – 6

Loading an individual magazine tray

왘Press desired magazine tray button 3.

If a disc is loaded, it will be ejected.

왘Take disc out of slot 1.

왘Wait until LED for magazine tray

button 3 which you pressed flashes

quickly.

왘Insert disc into slot 1.

The DVD changer draws the disc in and

begins playback if:

앫it has been loaded correctly

앫it is a permissible type of disc

Loading all six magazine trays

왘Press load button 2.

The DVD changer checks the load sta-

tus of all magazine trays and switches

to the first empty tray.

왘Wait until LED for corresponding maga-

zine tray button 3 flashes quickly.

왘Insert disc into slot 1.

The DVD changer switches to the next

empty magazine tray.

왘Repeat last two steps until all trays are

loaded.

The DVD changer will play the last disc

you loaded if:

앫it has been loaded correctly

앫it is a permissible type of disc

iEach magazine tray button 3 indicates the

status of the corresponding magazine tray by

means of an LED.

앫LED off = magazine tray is empty

앫LED constantly lit = magazine tray is loaded

앫LED flashes = CD/DVD changer requesting

disc to be loaded

iIf a disc is not inserted within approximately

15 seconds COMAND resumes playback of the

last disc.

117

Control systems

COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3

Inserting a PCMCIA card

1Slot for PCMCIA card

왘Insert PCMCIA card into slot 1.

The side with the contact must point

towards the slot.

If the PCMCIA card contains a storage

medium with MP3 tracks, COMAND

switches to MP3 mode.

Ejecting CDs and DVDs

Ejecting from the DVD changer

1Disc slot

2Magazine tray buttons 1 – 6

3Eject button (all discs)

왘Ejecting one disc: Press desired mag-

azine tray button 2.

왘Take disc out of slot 1.

If you do not take the disc out of

slot 1, the DVD changer will draw it

back automatically in approximately

15 seconds.

iCOMAND supports commercially available

PCMCIA cards or PCMCIA card adapters with

storage media that may not be designed for the

temperatures which occur in the vehicle. You

should therefore remove the PCMCIA card from

the vehicle when not in use since extreme tem-

peratures could damage these devices. Warning! G

Only eject a disc when the vehicle is station-

ary. You may otherwise be distracted from

the traffic conditions and could cause an ac-

cident.

iIf you eject one disc while playing another

disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback. Play-

back continues once the disc has been ejected.

컄컄

118

Control systems

COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3

왘Ejecting all discs: Press eject

button 3.

The DVD changer switches to the first

loaded tray and ejects the disc.

왘Take disc out of slot 1.

The DVD changer switches to the next

loaded magazine tray and ejects the

disc.

왘Repeat last step until magazine is

empty.

Ejecting a PCMCIA card

1Eject button

2Slot for PCMCIA card

왘Press eject button 1 twice.

The PCMCIA card is ejected.

왘Take PCMCIA card out of slot 2.

컄컄

119

Control systems

COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3

Submenu overview

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

CD or DVD-A or MP3 Pause/Stop/Play

(audio DVD mode only)

Tracks/Track

List/Tracks A-Z

Folders

(MP3 mode only)

Changer Sound

Normal Track Sequence Pause playback Show track list

(audio CD mode and

audio DVD mode)

Select folder Select medium Treble

Random Tracks Stop playback Display alphabetical

track listing

(MP3 mode only)

Bass

Random folder

(MP3 mode only)

Restart playback Balance/Fader

Repeat folder

(MP3 mode only)

3D Sound

Group

(DVD-Audio mode only)

120

Control systems

COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3

Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or

MP3 mode

왘Load CD/DVD (컄page 115) or

PCMCIA card (컄page 117).

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”, then “CD”,

“DVD-Audio” or “MP3”.

왘Press the M shortcut button once or

twice.

Example display in audio CD mode

1Current playback option

2Track number

3Disc number

4Disc name (only if saved on the disc)

5Track name (only if saved on the disc)

6Track time

7Graphic time and track display

8Sound settings

9Medium selection

aTo call up track listing

bDisc type

cPlayback options

Example display in audio DVD mode

1Current playback option

2Track number

3Disc number

4Disc name (only if saved on the disc)

5Track name (only if saved on the disc)

6Track time

7Graphic time and track display

8Sound settings

9Medium selection

aTo call up track listing

bStop function

cPause (“Play” appears if paused)

dDisc type

ePlayback options

iThe M shortcut button takes you directly

to the previously set disc mode (audio CD,

audio DVD or MP3-CD/DVD). The number of

times you have to press the shortcut button de-

pends on the previously set mode.

121

Control systems

COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3

Example display in MP3 mode

1Current playback option

2Medium type

3Disc number (not on PCMCIA card)

4Track name

5Current folder path

6Current folder

7Track time

8Graphic time and track display

9Sound settings

aMedium selection

bFolder listing

cTrack listing

dPlayback options

Stop function

왘Stopping playback: Select “Audio” 

“Audio”  “DVD-Audio”  “Stop”.

왘Restarting playback: Select “Audio”

 “Audio”  “DVD-Audio”  “Play”.

Playback starts at the beginning of the

DVD.

Pause function

In audio CD, audio DVD and MP3 mode

왘Pausing playback:

Press F briefly.

왘Continuing playback: Press F

again briefly.

Only in audio DVD mode

왘Pausing playback:

Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “DVD-Au-

dio”  “Pause”.

The “Pause” screen changes to “Play”.

왘Continuing playback: Select “Audio”

 “Audio”  “DVD-Audio”  “Play”.

The “Play” screen changes to “Pause”.

Selecting CD/DVD/MP3 media

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”.

왘Select “CD”, “DVD-Audio” or “MP3”.

COMAND begins playback.

왘In audio CD, audio DVD and MP3

mode: Select “Changer”.

왘In audio CD and audio DVD mode

only: Press n when the main area is

selected.

The media list appears. The dot R in-

dicates the current medium.

왘Select a medium or folder.

COMAND changes the medium.

iThis function is only available in audio DVD

mode.

122

Control systems

COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3

Selecting a track

Selecting by skipping to tracks

왘Skipping forwards or backwards to

a track (in CD or DVD mode only):

Rotate ymz.

Selecting from the track list

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”.

왘Select “CD”, “DVD-Audio” or “MP3”.

왘Select “Tracks”, “Tracks A-Z” or “Track

list”.

왘Only in MP3 mode: Press n when the

main area is selected.

The track list of the current folder ap-

pears. The dotR indicates the current

track.

왘Select a track by rotating ymz or slid-

ing qmr.

Fast forward/rewind

왘Select main area.

왘Slide and hold omp until desired place

is reached.

Selecting a folder

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “MP3” 

“Folder”.

왘Press n when main area is selected.

The track list of the current folder ap-

pears.

This is what the illustration in the right

column is showing as well.

1Back folder symbol

2Current track symbol

3Track symbol

왘Selecting one folder higher: Select

the Q symbol.

The display changes to the next folder

up in the folder structure on the disc.

iSkipping forwards through the tracks skips

to the next track. Skipping backwards through

the tracks skips to the beginning of the current

track if the track has been playing for more than

8 seconds. If the track has been playing for less

than 8 seconds, it skips to the start of the previ-

ous track.

If you have switched on the “Random Tracks”

playback option, the order of the tracks is ran-

dom.

iIn MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracks in

alphabetical order.

iThis function is only available in audio MP3

mode.

123

Control systems

COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3

1Back folder symbol

2Current folder symbol

3Folder symbol containing tracks

왘Selecting a folder: Select desired fold-

er.

You will see the tracks in the folder.

왘Select a track.

The track is played and the correspond-

ing folder is now the active folder.

Setting the audio format

This function lets you choose the audio for-

mat that you would like COMAND to play

and is only available in DVD-Audio mode.

왘Select “Audio”  “Audio”  “DVD-Au-

dio”  “Group”.

The list of available audio formats appears.

A dot R indicates the format currently se-

lected.

왘Changing setting: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Exiting menu: Slide omp.

Playback options

The following options are available:

앫“Normal Track Sequence”

Tracks playback in the order on the

disc (e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).

앫“Random Tracks”

Tracks playback in a random order

(e.g. track 3, 8, 5, etc.).

앫“Random Folder” (in MP3 mode only)

Tracks in the active folder and any sub-

folders playback in random order.

앫“Repeat Folder” (in MP3 mode only)

Tracks in the active folder will be re-

peated until you switch the function

off.

왘Selecting an option: Select “Audio”

 “Audio”.

왘Select “CD”, “DVD-Audio” or “MP3”.

The option list appears. A dot R indi-

cates which option is switched on.

왘Select an option and press n.

The option is switched on. For all op-

tions except “Normal Track Sequence”,

you will see a corresponding indicator

in the main area.

iThe tracks on an audio DVD can be stored in

various audio formats. The number of audio for-

mats depends on the audio DVD.

iThe “Group” menu item cannot be selected

if only one audio format is saved on the DVD.

iThe “Normal Track Sequence” option is au-

tomatically activated when you select a different

medium. If an option is activated, it remains acti-

vated after COMAND is switched on/off.

124

Control systems

COMAND video DVD (USA only)

Depending on your vehicle’s production

date the COMAND video DVD function may

not be available.

Automatic picture fade-out

If a video DVD is playing when the vehicle

is shifted from position P into N, D or R the

picture is faded out automatically and the

following message appears in the display:

“In order not to distract driver, picture is

faded out while the vehicle is in motion”.

When the vehicle is shifted back into P, the

picture comes on again.

Notes about video DVD operation

COMAND can playback commercially

available, prerecorded video DVDs that

bear the following label. You will usually

find the label on the DVD booklet, the inlay,

or the DVD itself.

Some DVDs may not comply with the

NTSC or PAL TV playback standards.

Sound, picture and other playback prob-

lems may occur when you play such DVDs.

COMAND can playback video DVDs meet-

ing the following requirements:

앫Correct regional code

앫NTSC or PAL TV standard

The appropriate information is usually giv-

en either on the DVD or the DVD box. The

factory setting of COMAND is regional

code 1. The setting can be changed at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. This

will allow you to playback video DVDs with

other regional codes, as long as they com-

ply with the NTSC or PAL TV standard.

Warning! G

COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser

product. You must not open the casing.

There is a risk of exposure to invisible laser

radiation if you open the casing, or if the

casing is faulty or damaged.

COMAND does not contain any parts that

you are able to maintain yourself. For safety

reasons, all maintenance work must be car-

ried out by qualified technicians.

iVideo DVDs differ from recordable DVD-R

and DVD-RW discs.

iThere may be playback problems when play-

ing copied DVDs.

There is a large variety of discs, disc-writing soft-

ware and writers available. This variety means

that there is no guarantee that the system will be

able to play discs that you have written/copied

yourself.

125

Control systems

COMAND video DVD (USA only)

Notes about handling DVDs

앫Only hold discs by the edge.

앫Handle discs carefully to prevent play-

back problems.

앫Avoid getting scratches, fingerprints

and dust on discs.

앫Clean discs from time to time with a

commercially-available cleaning cloth.

Do not wipe them with a circular mo-

tion, but only in straight lines from the

center outwards.

앫Only use a pen designed for such a pur-

pose to label discs.

앫Place discs back in their boxes after

use.

앫Protect discs from heat and direct sun-

light.

Functional limitations

Depending on the DVD, it is possible that

certain functions or actions may be tempo-

rarily or permanently unavailable. If you try

to utilize such functions or carry out such

actions, you will see the 7 symbol in the

display.

Inserting or ejecting DVDs

왘Inserting a DVD (컄page 115).

왘Ejecting a DVD (컄page 117).

!Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.

These could peel away and damage COMAND.

COMAND is designed to hold discs which com-

ply with the IEC 60908 standard. You can there-

fore only use discs with a maximum thickness of

1.3 mm.

If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain

data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio

data on the other), they cannot be ejected and

can damage COMAND.

Do not use discs with an 8 cm diameter, even if

they have an adapter.

Only use round discs with a 12 cm diameter.

Warning! G

Only insert or eject a DVD when the vehicle

is stationary. There is a risk of accident by

being distracted from road and traffic condi-

tions if you load a DVD while the vehicle is in

motion.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-

ly 14 m) every second.

126

Control systems

COMAND video DVD (USA only)

Submenu overview of video DVD

Switching to video DVD mode

왘Insert a DVD (컄page 115).

왘Select “Video”  “Video”  “Video

DVD”.

왘Press the M shortcut button once or

twice.

DVD-V Pause/Play Stop Changer Sound

DVD Functions Pause playback Pause Playback Select medium Treble

Brightness Continue playback Stop playback Bass

Contrast Restart playback Balance/Fader

Color 3D Sound

16:9 Optimized

4:3

Widescreen

iThe M shortcut button takes you directly

to the previously set disc mode (audio CD/DVD,

MP3-CD/DVD or video DVD). The number of

times you have to press the shortcut button de-

pends on the previously set mode.

127

Control systems

COMAND video DVD (USA only)

Hiding/showing the DVD control menu

왘Hiding the menu: Slide qmr.

왘Showing the menu: Slide qmr.

왘Wait for approximately 8 seconds.

Control menu

1Disc type

2Current track

3Current scene

4Elapsed track time

5Show the menu system

Hiding/showing the menu system

왘Showing the menu: Press n.

왘Hiding the menu: Press n when the

main menu area is selected.

Menu system

1Video DVD options

2Pause

3Stop

4Medium selection

5Sound settings

Fast forward/rewind

왘Slide omp and hold until you get to the

desired scene.

Selecting the DVD medium

왘Select “Video”  “Video”  “Video

DVD”.

왘Show the menu system, if necessary

(컄page 127).

왘Select “Changer”.

The media list appears. The dotR indi-

cates the current medium.

왘Select a medium.

COMAND changes the medium.

128

Control systems

COMAND video DVD (USA only)

Stop playback

왘Select “Video”  “Video”  “Video

DVD”.

왘Show the menu system, if necessary

(컄page 127).

왘Stop play: Select “Stop”.

In the display, “Pause” changes to

“Play”.

왘Continue playback: Select “Play”.

Play is continued from the point at

which it was stopped.

왘Stop playback: Select “Stop” again

while playback is stopped.

왘Select “Stop” twice in quick succession

during playback.

왘Resume playback: Select “Play”.

Playbacks starts again from the begin-

ning.

Pause playback

왘Select “Video”  “Video”  “Video

DVD”.

왘Show the menu system, if necessary

(컄page 127).

왘Pause playback: Select “Pause”.

In the display, “Pause” changes to

“Play”.

왘Continue playback: Select “Play”.

Play is continued from the point at

which it was stopped.

Selecting scene/chapter

왘Make sure that the control menu is

shown (컄page 127).

왘Skipping forwards or back: Slide

omp or turn ymz.

Selecting film/track

왘Select “Video”  “Video”  “Video

DVD”.

왘Show the menu system, if necessary

(컄page 127).

왘Select “DVD-V”  “DVD Functions” 

“Title selection”.

A selection list appears.

왘Select a film/track.

Screen settings

Setting brightness, contrast and color

왘Select “Video”  “Video”  “Video

DVD”.

왘Show the menu system, if necessary

(컄page 127).

왘Select “DVD-V”  “Brightness” 

“Contrast”or “Color”.

iThis function is only available if the DVD is

comprised of several film/tracks.

129

Control systems

COMAND video DVD (USA only)

왘Changing settings: Slide qmr or turn

ymz until you reach the desired set-

ting.

왘Saving settings: Press n.

Changing the picture format

왘Select “Video”  “Video”  “Video

DVD”.

왘Show the menu system, if necessary

(컄page 127).

왘Select “DVD-V”.

The DVD-V menu appears. The dotRin

front of a menu item -

“16:9 Optimized”, “4:3” or “Wide-

screen” indicates the current format.

왘Changing the format: Slide qmr or

turn ymz, until you reach the desired

setting.

왘Saving the format: Press n.

DVD menu

The DVD menu is the menu stored on the

DVD itself. It is structured in various ways

according to the individual DVD and per-

mits certain actions and settings.

Calling up the DVD menu

왘Select “Video”  “Video”  “Video

DVD”.

왘Show the menu system, if necessary

(컄page 127).

왘Select “DVD-V” “DVD Func-

tions”“Menu”.

The DVD menu appears.

Selecting menu items in the DVD menu

왘Slide qmr or omp.

왘Confirming the selection: Press n.

The selection menu appears.

왘Reconfirming the selection: Select

“Select”.

COMAND carries out the action de-

fined by the selected DVD menu item.

iDepending on the DVD, it is possible the

menu item “Play” either has no function or has

no function in certain parts of the DVD menu.

130

Control systems

COMAND video DVD (USA only)

Stopping the film or skipping to the

beginning/end of a scene

왘Select a menu item of your choice from

the DVD menu.

The selection menu appears.

1Stop film

2Skip to the end of a scene

3Skip to the beginning of a scene

왘Stopping the film: Select “Stop”.

왘Skipping to the end of a scene:

Select H.

왘Skipping to the beginning of a

scene: Select G.

Switching to the next highest DVD

menu level

왘Press the L back button in the cen-

ter console.

왘Select the corresponding menu item in

the DVD menu.

왘Select a menu item of your choice from

the DVD menu.

왘Select the menu item “Go up” in the se-

lection menu.

Back to the film

왘Press the L back button until you

can see the film.

왘Select the corresponding menu item in

the DVD menu.

왘Select a menu item of your choice from

the DVD menu.

왘Select the menu item “Back (to the

film)” in the selection menu.

iDepending on the DVD, it is possible the

menu items H and G either have no func-

tion or have no function in certain parts of the

DVD menu.

iDepending on the DVD, it is possible the

menu item “Go up” either has no function or has

no function in certain parts of the DVD menu.

iDepending on the DVD, it is possible the

menu item “Back (to the film)” either has no

function or has no function in certain parts of the

DVD menu.

131

Control systems

COMAND video DVD (USA only)

Setting the language and audio format

왘Select “Video”  “Video”  “Video

DVD”.

왘Show the menu system, if necessary

(컄page 127).

왘Select “DVD-V”  “DVD Functions”.

왘Select “Menu Language” or “Audio Lan-

guage”.

In both cases a selection list will ap-

pear. The dotRin front of an entry

indicates the current language.

왘Changing the setting: Slide qmr or

turn ymz, until you reach the desired

setting.

왘Saving a setting: Press n.

왘Exiting the menu: Slide omp.

Subtitles and camera angles

왘Select “Video”  “Video”  “Video

DVD”.

왘Show the menu system, if necessary

(컄page 127).

왘Select “DVD-V”  “DVD Functions”.

왘Select “Subtitles” or “Camera angle”.

In both cases a selection list will ap-

pear. The dotRin front of an entry

indicates the current language.

왘Changing the setting: Slide qmr or

turn ymz, until you reach the desired

setting.

왘Saving a setting: Press n.

왘Exiting the menu: Slide omp.

Interactive content

왘Selecting an action: Slide qmr or

omp, or turn ymz, until you reach the

desired setting.

왘Initiating an action: Press n.

A menu appears, the first entry “Se-

lect” is highlighted.

왘Press n.

iThis function is not available for all DVDs. If

it is available, you can set the language for the

DVD menu and the audio language and/or the

audio format. The number of settings you can

make is determined by the content of the DVD. It

may also be possible to make the settings in the

DVD menu (컄page 129).

iThis function is not available for all DVDs.

The number of settings you can make is deter-

mined by the content of the DVD. It may also be

possible to make the settings in the DVD menu

(컄page 129).

iDVDs may include interactive content (e.g. a

video game). In a video game you can control the

play by selecting and initiating actions. The type

and number of actions depends on the DVD.

132

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Safety precautions

General notes Calls disconnected while the vehicle is

in motion

A call may be disconnected if:

앫there is insufficient network coverage

앫you move from one transmitter/receiv-

er area (cell) into another and no chan-

nels are free or the cell is full

Warning! G

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from

using a cellular telephone while driving.

Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety

reasons, the driver should not use the cellu-

lar telephone while the vehicle is in motion.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location before

placing or answering a call.

If you nonetheless choose to use the mobile

phone1 while driving, please use the hands-

free feature and be sure to pay attention to

the traffic situation at all times. Use the mo-

bile phone only when road, weather and traf-

fic conditions permit. Otherwise, you may

not be able to observe traffic conditions and

could endanger yourself and others.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet (approxima-

tely 14 m) every second.

1Observe all legal requirements.

Warning! G

Never operate radio transmitters equipped

with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-

out being connected to an external antenna)

from inside the vehicle while the engine is

running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-

tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-

sibly resulting in an accident and/or

personal injury.

iUSA only:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and

(2) this device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

iCanada only:

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

133

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Operating options

When the mobile phone is inserted in the

cradle, you can operate the telephone us-

ing the following devices:

앫mobile phone keypad

앫COMAND telephone keypad

앫buttons s and t on the multi-

function steering wheel (컄page 267)

앫Voice Control* (컄page 291)

앫Bluetooth® headset (컄page 147)

Please note that these functions are only

available with Mercedes-Benz approved

mobile phones. Please contact an autho-

rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-

tion on features available for your mobile

phone of choice.

You can control other functions of the mo-

bile phone via the COMAND, instrument

cluster control system (컄page 278) or

Voice Control*.

The descriptions in this section assume

that the mobile phone is inserted in the

cradle. Exceptions to this are clearly stat-

ed.

Unless otherwise indicated, the descrip-

tions and illustrations in this section refer

to COMAND and the telephone keypad.

Operation using the mobile phone and

Bluetooth® headset is described in the re-

spective separate Operating Instructions.

Caller ID

COMAND can display the telephone num-

ber and the name of the caller, e.g. for an

incoming call and also in other menus or

displays.

For the telephone number to be displayed,

the caller must transmit their telephone

number.

This is also the case for name displays. For

this, the telephone number and the name

of the caller must also be saved in the mo-

bile phone book.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85) and

(컄page 94).

iVarious mobile phone cradles can be in-

stalled in the front center armrest, see separate

installation instructions for the mobile phone

cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be ob-

tained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-

ter. For more information about telephone

(컄page 507). iIn order for the functions described in this

section to work correctly, the Bluetooth® head-

set must be linked to COMAND (컄page 241).

Please make sure any Bluetooth® headset linked

with the mobile phone is switched off or that the

headset is linked with COMAND before you in-

sert the mobile phone in the cradle (컄page 507)

and use the telephone functions with COMAND.

134

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Functional restrictions

You will not be able to use the telephone,

or you may have to wait a while, in the fol-

lowing situations:

앫If the telephone has not yet logged into

the network.

The telephone automatically tries to

log into a network. If no network is

available, you will also not be able to

make a “911” emergency call.

If you attempt to make an outgoing call,

the “No Service” message will appear

for a short while.

앫If the mobile phone is not inserted in

the cradle.

앫SIM card is not inserted in GSM type

phone.

Notes about COMAND telephone fea-

tures using a Bluetooth® connection

Many of the Mercedes-Benz approved mo-

bile phones, cradles and adaptors avail-

able for use in your vehicle utilize

Bluetooth® technology to communicate

with each other and the vehicle. Depend-

ing on your phone brand and model, the

number of in-vehicle or on-display

COMAND telephone features supported

via Bluetooth® communication, and thus

available for your use, may vary.

The descriptions and illustrations in this

section are based on the use of fully com-

patible Mercedes-Benz approved mobile

phones and cradles that do not utilize Blue-

tooth® technology to communicate with

each other. If your vehicle is equipped with

integrated Bluetooth® functionality than a

Bluetooth® capable mobile phone, head-

set, Laptop, PDA, etc. is required to utilize

those features.

For additional information about

Mercedes-Benz approved Bluetooth® mo-

bile phones and related accessories please

contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer As-

sistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

or your nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Switching telephone on or off

왘Switching on: Insert mobile phone

into cradle when COMAND is switched

on.

왘Switch on the mobile phone

(see mobile phone operating instruc-

tions).

왘Switching off: Select “Telephone” 

“Telephone”  “Telephone OFF”.

왘Switch off mobile phone (see mobile

phone operating instructions).

iThe roof cargo container* may impair mo-

bile phone reception. In an emergency, remove

the mobile phone from the mobile phone cradle

(컄page 507) to make a call.

135

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Activating telephone mode

왘Select “Telephone”  “Telephone” 

“Telephone”.

왘Press s on telephone keypad.

Telephone keypad

1Telephone keypad

2Folding cover

With the telephone keypad you can:

앫Enter and clear numbers and special

characters

앫Reject, accept, connect and end calls

왘Entering characters: Select “Tele-

phone”  “Telephone”  “Telephone”.

왘Fold up cover 2.

왘Enter characters using A- #.

왘Deleting individual characters:

Press *.

왘Deleting an entire word or number:

Press and hold * until the word or

number is deleted.

“911” emergency call

The following conditions must be fulfilled

in order to make a “911” emergency call:

앫The phone is switched on.

앫A mobile network is available.

앫There is a valid SIM card in the phone

(not necessary in all mobile networks).

If you cannot make an emergency call, you

must initiate rescue measures yourself.

The “911” emergency call is a public ser-

vice. Any misuse is punishable by law.

iYou can enter the * character by

pressing > once. Pressing this button again

within 1.5 seconds enters the + character.

iThe “911” emergency call system is a public

service. Using it without due cause is a criminal

offense.

iThis function places a call to the local 911

provider. It does not initiate a Tele Aid call.

iIf no SIM card is inserted in the mobile

phone, you can only initiate a “911” emergency

call by using COMAND and the mobile phone.

136

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Placing a “911” emergency call before

entering PIN/PIN2, PUK/PUK2 or un-

lock code

Entering the number using the COMAND

controller

왘Select “Telephone”  “Telephone” 

“Telephone”  “Dial 911”.

Entering the number using the tele-

phone keypad

왘Enter digits 9-1-1 (컄page 135).

왘Press s.

Placing a “911” emergency call after

entering PIN/PIN2, PUK/PUK2 or un-

lock code

Entering the number using the COMAND

controller

왘Select “Telephone”  “Telephone” 

“Telephone”.

왘Select all the digits in sequence.

왘Select “S”.

Entering the number using the tele-

phone keypad

왘Enter digits 9-1-1 (컄page 135).

왘Press s.

Confirming the emergency call

After the digits have been entered, you will

see the question “Do you want to dial the

911 emergency number?”.

왘Use COMAND controller to select

“Yes”.

The telephone makes the connection.

왘Wait until the emergency call center

answers and describe the emergency

situation.

iThe roof cargo container* may impair mo-

bile phone reception. In an emergency, remove

the mobile phone from the mobile phone cradle

(컄page 507) to make a call.

137

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Entering the PIN

Entering using the COMAND controller

왘Select “Telephone”  “Telephone” 

“Telephone”.

왘Entering: Select all the digits in se-

quence.

왘Deleting a digit: Select ) and briefly

press n.

왘Deleting an entire number: Select )

and press and hold n until the number

is deleted.

왘Confirming an entry: Press n.

Entering using the telephone keypad

왘Entering: Enter digits (컄page 135).

왘Confirming an entry: Press n or

press s.

Entering the PIN2

The phone may request the PIN2 in order

to use certain functions. A corresponding

message appears in the display.

왘Enter PIN2 digits into mobile phone.

Entering the PUK/PUK2

If you enter the PIN or PIN2 incorrectly

three times, the SIM card will be locked.

A corresponding message appears in the

display. It is necessary to enter the

PUK/PUK2 to unlock it. The PUK and/or

PUK2 are provided by your telephone ser-

vice provider.

왘Enter PUK/PUK2 digits into mobile

phone.

iYour PIN code (Personal Identification Num-

ber code) prevents unauthorized persons from

using your GSM mobile phone. The PIN code is a

number string, which you have to enter when

switching on the telephone.

The PIN entry applies only to GSM mobile

phones. iThe PIN2 entry applies only to GSM mobile

phones.

iThe PUK/PUK2 entry (Personal Unblocking

Key) applies only to GSM mobile phones.

138

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Entering the unlock code

Many mobile phones can be protected

from unauthorized use with an unlock code

(see mobile phone operating instructions).

If you wish to use the phone functions

when the unlock code is active, a screen

appears requesting that you enter the un-

lock code. You cannot use the phone func-

tions (except “911” emergency call) until

you have entered the unlock code.

왘Proceed in the same way as entering

the PIN (컄page 137).

139

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Telephone submenu overview

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

Name

(only when the mobile

phone is inserted in the

cradle)

Call lists

(not during a call)

DTMF

(only during a call)

Mic OFF/ON

(only during a call)

Text message

(not during a call)

Display COMAND phone

book

Display call list selection:

앫Calls received

앫Calls dialed

Send numerical se-

quence

Switch hands-free mi-

crophone on/off

Call up SMS inbox

140

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Main telephone menu

왘Calling up main menu: Select “Tele-

phone”  “Telephone”  “Telephone”.

왘Press s on the telephone keypad

(컄page 135).

Mailbox

The symbol in the example illustration

above indicates that your mailbox contains

new voice messages. You will have to call

the mailbox in order to retrieve the mes-

sages.

You can call your mailbox by:

앫Speed dialing (컄page 145)

앫Entering a telephone number using the

telephone keypad (컄page 144)

앫Entering the telephone number using

the COMAND controller (컄page 144)

iIf you press s when the main telephone

menu has already been called up, the “Calls Di-

aled” list will appear (컄page 141).

1Numbers/characters to enter tele-

phone number

2Symbol for new voice message in

mailbox

3Symbol for unread SMS messag-

es in SMS inbox (컄page 156)

4Signal strength and network status

display

앫Network status “READY” = mobile

phone is logged in with its own

provider’s network

앫Network status “READY ROAM” =

mobile phone is logged in with an-

other provider’s network

앫Network status “No Service” = No

network available

5To show COMAND phone book

(“Name”) (컄page 148)

6To call up text message (SMS)

(컄page 156)

7To display call list selection

(컄page 141)

iOnce connection with your mailbox has

been established, the mailbox system will guide

you through the next steps.

141

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Call lists

COMAND can display the following calls in

separate lists:

앫Calls received

앫Calls dialed

Calling up a list

왘Select “Call List” from main telephone

menu.

왘Select “Calls Received” or “Calls Di-

aled”.

The corresponding list appears.

Illustration: list of incoming calls

1To close list

2To switch list display (“123” or “ABC”)

3To call up options

4Name or telephone number of a caller

5Unknown caller

6Telephone number of a caller

왘Switching to list display: Select

“123” or “ABC”.

The display changes to telephone num-

ber or name display.

왘Closing list: Slide omp and

select “Back”.

왘Selecting a list entry: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz and select entry.

iThe list of incoming calls contains received

calls as well as missed calls.

iThe “Calls Received” and “Calls Dialed”

menu items do not function if the respective list

has no entries.

The “Call List” menu item does not function if

neither list has any entries.

iIn the list of calls received, you will see the

name of caller 4 if

앫the caller transmitted the telephone number

앫the name and telephone number are saved

in the COMAND address book or in the

phone book on the mobile phone

앫the telephone number is saved in the same

way in which the caller transmits it

You will see the telephone number of caller 6 if

앫the caller transmitted the telephone number

앫no caller data is saved in either the COMAND

address book or the phone book on the mo-

bile phone

An unknown caller 5 has not transmitted his or

her telephone number.

iIn the list of dialed calls, you will see the

name of the person called if you have saved his

or her telephone number and name in the

COMAND address book or in the phone book on

the mobile phone. If no data has been saved, you

will see the telephone number.

컄컄

142

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Displaying details of a list entry

COMAND can also show a shortened list

entry in its entirety.

왘Select list entry (컄page 141).

왘Slide omp and select “Options” 

“Details”.

The detailed view appears.

왘Closing detailed view: Slide qmr or

omp or press n.

Saving a list entry in the address book

Saving as a new entry in the COMAND

address book

왘Slide omp or rotate ymz and select

list entry (컄page 141).

왘Select “Options”  “Save”  “New En-

try”.

왘Select a number category, e.g. “Home”.

왘Select a telephone category, e.g. “Land

Line”.

왘Select “Save”.

The input menu appears with the data

fields. The data field for the telephone

number is filled in automatically. The

data field for the last name is also filled

in automatically if the entry to be saved

contains a name.

왘If you would like to save the entry

now: Select ?.

1Data field

2Input mark (cursor)

3Input characters

왘If you want to change the available

characters: Proceed as described in

the “Changing data field” paragraph in

the “Assigning a New Entry in the Ad-

dress Book” section (컄page 152).

Adding to an existing entry in the

COMAND address book

왘Slide omp or rotate ymz and select

list entry (컄page 141).

왘Select “Options”  “Save”  “Add”.

iList entries that show a telephone number

are neither saved in the COMAND address book,

nor in the phone book on the mobile phone. You

can save such entries in the COMAND address

book. You can also save list entries in the

COMAND address book which have already been

saved in the phone book on the mobile phone.

i“Save” does not function if the selected list

entry is already saved in the COMAND address

book.

컄컄

143

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

왘Select a number category to add,

e.g. “Home”.

왘Select a telephone category to add,

e.g. “Land Line”.

왘Select “Save”.

The search menu for COMAND address

book entries appears.

왘Search for desired entry.

왘Press n when you have finished

searching.

COMAND saves the data if there are

fewer than four numbers assigned to

the entry you are searching for in the

selected number category.

If four numbers are saved for the entry

you are searching for, a prompt will ap-

pear asking whether you want to over-

write one of the existing numbers.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes”, a selection list will

appear containing the four existing

numbers.

왘Select the number to be overwritten.

COMAND overwrites the selected num-

ber with the new data.

Incoming call

Rejecting or accepting the call

왘Rejecting: Select “Reject”.

왘Press t on the telephone keypad or

on the multifunction steering wheel.

왘Accepting: Select “Accept”.

왘Press s on the telephone keypad or

on the multifunction steering wheel.

왘Press 0 on the multifunction steer-

ing wheel.

왘Use the mobile phone (see mobile

phone operating instructions).

왘Use the Bluetooth® headset

(see headset operating instructions).

If you have accepted the call using

COMAND, the telephone keypad, the mul-

tifunction steering wheel or the mobile

phone, the call will be conducted via the

hands-free system. The volume of the call

can be adjusted (컄page 96).

i“Save” does not function if the selected list

entry is already saved in the COMAND address

book.

iThere is a detailed description of searching

for an COMAND address book entry in the

“Searching for an address book entry” section

(컄page 228).

iIf you have a CDMA/TDMA mobile phone

and reject a call, only the ring tone will stop. The

call itself can only be ended by the caller.

iThe use of a Bluetooth® headset requires

Bluetooth® to be activated and the Bluetooth®

headset to be authorized (컄page 241).

144

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

If you have accepted the call using the

Bluetooth® headset, the call will be con-

ducted via the headset.

Further operating functions can be found

in the “Functions during a single-call con-

nection” section (컄page 146).

You can also accept a call if the

COMAND display is showing a screen oth-

er than the telephone mode screen. After

accepting the call, you will see the caller’s

data in a window.

왘Closing window: Slide qmr or omp

or press n.

Making an outgoing call

Entering the telephone number using

the COMAND controller

왘Switching screen to telephone

mode: Call up main telephone menu

(컄page 140).

왘Entering digits: Select desired digits

by rotating ymz or sliding omp and

press n.

왘Deleting individual digits: Select )

and briefly press n.

왘Deleting an entire telephone num-

ber: Select ) and press and hold n

until the telephone number is deleted.

왘Connecting a call: Select “S”.

Entering a telephone number using the

telephone keypad

왘Switching screen to telephone

mode: Call up main telephone menu

(컄page 140).

왘Use telephone keypad to enter digits.

왘Connecting a call: Press s.

Redial

왘Switching screen to telephone

mode: Call up main telephone menu

(컄page 140).

왘Use COMAND controller to select

“S”.

왘Press s on the telephone keypad

(컄page 88).

The list of dialed numbers appears. The

most recently dialed number is at the

top.

왘Select desired entry.

왘Connecting a call: Press n.

iIf you place an outgoing call and receive a

busy signal, the telephone automatically starts

to redial as long as the provider and the mobile

phone support this function (see mobile phone

operating instructions).

While the call is connecting, you can also send

character strings (컄page 146).

iA detailed description of how to enter digits

using the telephone keypad can be found on

(컄page 88).

iIf the list of dialed calls contains no entries,

the “S” menu item cannot be selected and the

s button on the telephone keypad does not

function.

145

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Placing a call to a call list entry or

COMAND phone book entry

왘Call up a call list and select an entry

(컄page 141).

왘Call up COMAND phone book and se-

lect an entry (컄page 148).

왘Connecting a call: Press n.

Speed dialing

You can save telephone numbers in the

speed-dial preset locations on the mobile

phone and call up the speed-dial presets

(see mobile phone operating instructions).

You can also call up speed-dial numbers

using COMAND.

Calling up speed-dial presets using the

COMAND controller

왘Switching screen to telephone

mode: Call up main telephone menu

(컄page 140).

왘Entering number of a speed-dial pre-

set: Select all the digits in sequence.

왘Deleting individual digits:

Select ) and briefly press n.

왘Deleting entire number:

Select ) and press n until the

number is deleted.

왘Connecting a call (speed-dial pre-

sets 1 -99): Select “S”.

왘Connecting a call (speed-dial pre-

sets 100 - 999): Select “#” after the

digits  “S”.

In both cases, the telephone connects

the call to the saved telephone num-

ber. If the speed-dial memory contains

no telephone numbers, you will see a

corresponding message.

왘Deleting message: Press n.

Calling up speed-dial numbers using the

telephone keypad

왘Switching screen to telephone

mode: Call up main telephone menu

(컄page 140).

왘Single-digit numbers: Press and hold

A- 9 buttons.

왘Single- and two-digit numbers: Enter

number using the A- 9 buttons.

왘Press s.

왘Three-digit numbers: Enter number

using the A- 9 buttons.

왘Press #, and then s.

In all three cases, COMAND connects

the call to the saved telephone num-

ber. If the speed-dial memory contains

no telephone numbers, you will see a

corresponding message.

iBy default, the mailbox number is preset in

the speed dial memory unless you have modified

it. For more information on the mailbox

(컄page 140).

iOperation during call connection depends

on the speed-dial preset position called up.

컄컄

146

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

왘Deleting message: Press n.

Functions during a single-call

connection

Illustration: telephone mode during a call

1Symbol for active telephone con-

nection (also visible in other operating

modes)

2Signal strength display

3To switch hands-free microphone on or

off

4Length of call display

5To send character strings

6To end a call

7Person you are calling

Switching the hands-free microphone

on or off

왘Switching screen to telephone

mode: Call up main telephone menu

(컄page 140).

왘Switching off microphone:

Select “Mic OFF” and press n.

왘Press F shortcut button.

If the microphone is switched off,

the > symbol appears in the main ar-

ea.

왘Switching on microphone:

Select “Mic ON”.

왘Press F shortcut button.

The > symbol disappears.

Sending a character string via DTMF

Answering machines or other devices can

be controlled by character strings (e.g. for

remote query functions).

Sending character strings via the DTMF

왘During a call, select “DTMF”.

The DTMF dialing display appears.

iThe name of the person you are speaking

with can only be seen in display 7 if his or her

telephone number and name have been saved in

the COMAND address book or phone book on

the mobile phone. The telephone number must

also be saved in the same way in which the per-

son you are talking to transmits it. iThis function is not possible with every mo-

bile phone. If the mobile phone supports the

function, you can use it during the call connec-

tion and also during a call.

컄컄

147

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

1Back to the call display

2Character entry

3To call up the phone book

왘Sending individual characters:

Rotate ymz or slide omp and select

desired character.

Each character you select can be seen

in the main area and is sent immediate-

ly.

왘Sending a phone book entry as a

character string: Select “Name”.

왘Select desired phone book entry.

The entry is immediately sent as a char-

acter string.

왘Switching back to the call display:

Select “Y”.

Sending character strings via the tele-

phone keypad

왘Press corresponding button on tele-

phone keypad.

Each character you select is immedi-

ately sent.

Ending an active call

왘Ending a call: Select “4END” in the

call display.

왘Press t on the telephone keypad or

on the multifunction steering wheel.

The COMAND display will change to

the previously selected display, if appli-

cable.

Transferring a call

From the hands-free system to the

Bluetooth® headset

The call transfer is controlled by pressing

the PTT button on the Bluetooth® headset

(see headset operating instructions). Nor-

mally, it is sufficient to press the PTT but-

ton once, but under certain circumstances

you may have to press it a second time.

Once the call has been transferred to the

Bluetooth® headset, all the functions will

be available to you which are described in

the “Functions during a single-call connec-

tion” section (컄page 146).

Exception: “Switching the hands-free mi-

crophone on or off” function (컄page 146).

iTelephone numbers containing the + char-

acter may impair the function.

iThe + character may impair the function.

iThe use of a Bluetooth® headset requires

Bluetooth® to be activated and the Bluetooth®

headset to be authorized (컄page 241).

컄컄

148

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

From the Bluetooth® headset to the

hands-free system

On most Bluetooth® headsets, you press

the PTT button on the headset twice quick-

ly to transfer the call (see headset operat-

ing instructions).

From the hands-free system to the mo-

bile phone

왘If the mobile phone has a folding up-

per section: Flip upper section open.

왘Take mobile phone out of cradle.

The “No telephone inserted” message

appears on the COMAND display. Sub-

sequent operation is only possible us-

ing the mobile phone.

From the mobile phone to the

hands-free system

왘Insert mobile phone into cradle.

Once the call has been transferred to

the hands-free feature, all the functions

will be available to you which are de-

scribed in the “Functions during a sin-

gle-call connection” section

(컄page 146).

COMAND phone book

The COMAND phone book contains both

the COMAND address book entries and

mobile phone entries that have at least

one telephone number.

The COMAND address book entries are

permanently available even when a mobile

phone is not inserted in the cradle.

When the mobile phone is inserted in the

cradle, COMAND will read the phone book

entries in the mobile phone and compares

them with the COMAND address book en-

tries.

If any of the telephone numbers of a phone

book entry in the mobile phone are the

same as an address book entry, COMAND

will only display the address book entry.

If the entries are not the same, the CO-

MAND phone book will show the phone

book entry in the mobile phone.

Calling up the COMAND phone book

왘Select “Telephone”  “Telephone” 

“Telephone”  “Name”.

The COMAND phone book appears.

컄컄

149

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Illustration: a phone book with name dis-

play and smart speller activated

1Category symbol

2Upper entry from address book (with-

out category symbol)

3Symbol + for several telephone num-

bers (subentries) under the main entry

4Symbol for summarized entries

from the mobile phone with the same

name but different telephone numbers

5Smart speller

6Voice entry symbol

7To close the phone book

Entries with category symbol 1 come

from the mobile phone. The following cate-

gory symbols are possible:

앫 = symbol for “Mobile” category

앫 = symbol for “Home” category

앫 = symbol for “Work” category

앫 = symbol for “Fax” category

앫 = symbol for “Pager” category

앫 = symbol for “Main” category or for

unknown category or for phone entries

that are saved on the SIM card of a

GSM mobile phone

Entries without a category symbol or with

the symbol come from the COMAND

address book.

Entries with the symbol contain a voice

entry. Voice entries can be added to the

address book (컄page 234). This function

is available in vehicles with Voice Control*.

Switching between the smart speller

and the list

왘Switching from the smart speller to

the list: Slide mq repeatedly or press

n until the smart speller is hidden.

왘Rotate ymz or slide omp and

select ?.

The smart speller is hidden.

컄컄

150

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Illustration: list of phone book entries with

name display and hidden smart speller

1Back to smart speller

2To switch phone book display (“123” or

“ABC”)

3Symbol + for several telephone num-

bers (subentries) under the main entry,

subentry list is closed

4To call up options

5Symbol / for open subentry list

6List of phone book entries

7Subentry list with category symbols

and telephone numbers

왘Switching from the list to the smart

speller: Select “Back” from the list.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

왘Changing phone book display in the

list: Select “123” or “ABC”.

The screen changes to telephone num-

ber or name display.

Closing the COMAND phone book

왘In the smart speller, select “Back”.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

Selecting an entry in the COMAND

phone book

Selecting entries using the smart speller

왘Switch from the list to the smart speller

if necessary.

왘Changing smart speller language:

Select !.

왘Select desired language.

iThe following options are available under

“Options” menu item 4:

앫Displaying details about an entry

(컄page 151)

앫Creating a new entry in the address book

(컄page 152)

앫Deleting an entry (컄page 153)

앫Saving a phone book entry from mobile

phone in the address book (컄page 153)

앫Adding a telephone number to an address

book entry (컄page 155)

컄컄

151

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

왘Changing smart speller character

set: Select #.

Depending on the previous setting, you

will change to letters with special char-

acters or to numbers with special char-

acters.

왘Entering characters: Select the char-

acters of the entry you are searching

for one by one.

왘Deleting individual characters: Se-

lect ) and briefly press n.

Each time you enter or delete a charac-

ter, the closest match will be displayed

at the top of the list.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select )

and press and hold n until the entry is

deleted.

왘Canceling search: Switch from the

smart speller to the list.

The entry at the top of the list is auto-

matically highlighted.

Selecting using the list

왘If necessary, switch from the smart

speller to the list.

왘Rotate ymz or slide qmr until the de-

sired entry is highlighted.

Selecting subentries

왘Select an entry with the + symbol and

press n.

The + symbol changes to / and the

subentries are displayed.

왘Rotate ymz or slide qmr until the de-

sired subentry is highlighted.

Displaying details of an entry

COMAND can also show a shortened entry

in its entirety. For entries featuring suben-

tries, the detailed view is only available for

the subentries and not for the main entry.

왘Select entry (컄page 150).

왘Select “Options”  “Details”.

The detailed view appears.

왘Closing detailed view: Slide qmr or

omp or press n or back button L

in the center console (컄page 86).

Starting to dial the number of an entry

왘Select entry (컄page 150).

왘Press n.

왘Press s on the telephone keypad.

A list appears if the entry contains sub-

entries.

왘Select desired subentry.

왘Press n again.

왘Press s on the telephone key-

pad.

컄컄

152

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Assigning a New Entry in the Address

Book

왘Select “Options”  “New Entry” in the

COMAND phone book list.

왘Selecting a number category:

Select a category, e.g. “Home”.

왘Selecting a telephone category:

Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”.

왘Confirming selection: Select “Save”.

The input menu appears with the data

fields.

1Data field

2Input mark (cursor)

3Input characters

왘Changing data field: Slide qmr re-

peatedly until desired data field is high-

lighted.

왘Select [ or ] repeatedly until de-

sired data field is highlighted.

왘Entering data into a field: Select all

characters one by one from the input

characters line 3.

왘Toggling upper and lower case for

the input characters: Select & or

왘Changing language for the input

characters: Select !.

왘Select desired language.

왘Changing character set for the input

characters: Select #.

Depending on the previous setting, you

will change to letters with special char-

acters or to numbers with special char-

acters.

왘Displaying special characters as in-

put characters: Select !  “Sym-

bols”.

왘Returning input characters to nor-

mal characters: Select !  the

desired language.

왘Moving cursor in the data field:

Select Y or Z.

iThis function is used to create a new entry in

the address book and to enter the data (first

name, last name and telephone number) manu-

ally.

컄컄

153

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

왘Deleting individual characters:

Select ) and briefly press n.

The character to the left of the cursor is

deleted.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select )

and press and hold n until the entry is

deleted.

왘Saving an entry: Select ?.

왘Canceling an entry: Select “Back”.

If one of the data fields contains data, a

prompt will appear asking whether you

want to save the entry.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

The entry will either be saved or

not, depending on your selection.

Deleting an entry

The deletion rules may vary, depending on

the entry selected:

앫Upper entry selected from the address

book:

the entry is deleted from the COMAND

phone book and also from the address

book, if the address book entry only

contains telephone numbers.

앫Subentry of an address book entry se-

lected:

the subentry is deleted from the

COMAND phone book and from the ad-

dress book.

왘Deleting: Select entry (컄page 150).

왘Select “Options”  “Delete”.

A prompt appears asking whether the

entry should be deleted.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

Once “Yes” has been selected, the en-

try will be deleted according to the

rules mentioned above.

Saving a phone book entry from the

mobile phone in the address book

Saving as a new address book entry

왘Select phone book entry from mobile

phone (컄page 150).

왘Select “Options”  “Save”  “New En-

try”.

iIt is not possible to delete a phone book en-

try from the mobile phone using the COMAND

phone book.

iThis function is used to save an existing

phone book entry from the mobile phone in the

address book. The following options are avail-

able:

앫Saving as a new address book entry

앫Adding a telephone number to an existing

address book entry

iAll entries with the following category sym-

bols are phone book entries in the mobile phone.

앫 = symbol for “Mobile” category

앫 = symbol for “Home” category

앫 = symbol for “Work” category

앫 = symbol for “Fax” category

앫 = symbol for “Pager” category

앫 = symbol for “Main” category

컄컄

154

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

왘Selecting a number category:

Select a category, e.g. “Home”.

왘Selecting a telephone category:

Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”.

왘Confirming selection: Select “Save”.

The input menu appears with the data

fields. The data field for the telephone

number is filled in automatically. The

data field for the last name is also filled

when the entry to be saved contains a

name.

1Data field

2Input mark (cursor)

3Input characters

왘Proceed as described in the “Changing

data field” paragraph in the “Assigning

a New Entry in the Address Book” sec-

tion (컄page 152).

Adding a telephone number to an exist-

ing address book entry

왘Select phone book entry from mobile

phone (컄page 150).

왘Select “Options”  “Save”  “Add”.

왘Selecting a number category:

Select a category, e.g. “Home”.

왘Selecting a telephone category:

Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”.

왘Confirming selection: Select “Save”.

The search menu for address book en-

tries appears.

왘Search for desired entry using smart

speller function.

왘After selecting an entry, press n.

If there are fewer than four numbers

assigned to the selected entry in the

selected number category, COMAND

will save the data.

If four numbers are saved for the se-

lected entry, a prompt will appear ask-

ing whether you want to overwrite one

of the existing numbers.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes”, a selection list will

appear containing the four existing

numbers.

iAll entries with the following category sym-

bols are phone book entries in the mobile phone.

앫 = symbol for “Mobile” category

앫 = symbol for “Home” category

앫 = symbol for “Work” category

앫 = symbol for “Fax” category

앫 = symbol for “Pager” category

앫 = symbol for “Main” category

iThere is a detailed description of how to

search for an address book entry in the “Search-

ing for an address book entry” section

(컄page 228).

컄컄

155

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

왘Select number to be overwritten.

COMAND overwrites the selected num-

ber with the new data.

Adding a telephone number to an ad-

dress book entry

왘Select address book entry

(컄page 150).

왘Select “Options”  “Add Number”.

왘Selecting a number category:

Select a category, e.g. “Home”.

왘Selecting a telephone category:

Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”.

왘Confirming selection: Select “Save”.

If four numbers are saved for the entry

in the selected number category, a

prompt will appear asking whether one

of the existing numbers should be over-

written.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes”, a selection list

will appear containing the four ex-

isting numbers.

왘Select number to be overwritten.

The input menu appears with the

data field for entering the new tele-

phone number.

왘Entering digits: Select all digits one

by one from the input characters.

왘Moving cursor in the data field:

Select Y or Z.

왘Deleting individual digits: Select )

and briefly press n.

The digit to the left of the cursor is de-

leted.

왘Deleting an entire number:

Select ) and press and hold n until

the number is deleted.

왘Saving entry: Select ?.

왘Canceling an entry: Select “Back”.

If you have already entered data, a

prompt will appear asking whether the

entry should be saved.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

The entry will either be saved or

not, depending on your selection.

iThis function is used to add a telephone

number to an existing address book entry. The

telephone number can be entered manually.

iAll entries with the symbol or without a

symbol are address book entries.

i“Add Number” does not function if you have

selected the main entry for an address book en-

try with subentries.

156

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

SMS messages (Short Message

Service)

SMS functions

The following functions are available:

앫Receive

앫Read

The following conditions must be fulfilled

in order to use the functions:

앫The mobile phone is inserted in the cra-

dle and switched on.

앫The PIN has been entered (only GSM

mobile phones).

앫The mobile phone is logged into a mo-

bile network.

앫Mobile phone book must be download-

ed and available in COMAND.

Inbox

Calling up the SMS inbox

왘Select “Telephone”  “Telephone”.

The main telephone menu appears.

1Symbol for unread messages in the

SMS inbox

왘Select “Text Message”.

The SMS inbox appears.

1Date and time the highlighted SMS

message was received

2To call up options

3Highlighted SMS message

4Symbol for unread SMS message

5Back to main telephone menu

iThe symbol only appears for those mes-

sages which are received while the mobile phone

is inserted in the cradle.

i“Text Message” does not function if the

SMS inbox contains no SMS messages. The SMS

inbox only shows the messages which are re-

ceived while the mobile phone is inserted in the

cradle.

157

Control systems

COMAND telephone*

Selecting an SMS message

왘Rotate ymz or slide qmr and then

press n.

Showing abbreviated sender display in

full

왘Select SMS message  “Options” 

“Details”.

The detailed view appears.

왘Closing detailed view: Slide qmr or

press n.

Calling an SMS sender

왘Select SMS message  “Options” 

“Call”.

The telephone connects the call.

Saving SMS sender as new COMAND

address book entry

왘Selecting an SMS message: In the

SMS inbox, select a message  “Op-

tions”  “Save Number”  “New En-

try”.

왘Selecting a number category:

Select a category, e.g. “Home”.

왘Selecting a telephone category:

Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”.

왘Saving: Select “Save”.

The input menu appears with the data

fields. The data field for the telephone

number is filled in automatically.

1Data field

2Input mark (cursor)

3Input characters

왘Proceed as described in the “Changing

data field” paragraph in the “Assigning

a New Entry in the Address Book” sec-

tion (컄page 152).

Adding an SMS sender’s telephone num-

ber to an existing address book entry

왘Selecting an SMS message: In the

SMS inbox, select a message  “Op-

tions”  “Save Number”  “Add”.

iThe SMS messages are sorted by the date

and time they were received. The most recent

message is at the top of the list.

If the name and telephone number of the sender

is saved in the address book or phone book of

the mobile phone, you will see the name of the

sender in the SMS inbox. Otherwise, you will see

the telephone number of the sender.

158

Control systems

왘Proceed as described in the “Selecting a number category” paragraph in the “Adding a telephone number to an existing address

book entry” section (컄page 154).

Exiting the SMS inbox

왘Select “Back”.

The main telephone menu appears.

Reading an SMS message

왘In the SMS inbox, select an SMS mes-

sage and press n.

The SMS message appears.

Using data in a text message

왘Selecting data from the text:

Rotate ymz or slide qmr.

왘Using data: Press n  “Use”.

If you have selected a telephone num-

ber, the telephone connects the call.

If you have selected a navigable ad-

dress, it is transferred to the navigation

system.

Calling an SMS sender

왘Press n  “Call”.

The telephone connects the call.

Saving SMS sender as new address book

entry

왘Press n  “Save Number”  “New

Entry”.

왘Proceed as described in the “Selecting

a number category” paragraph in the

“Saving SMS sender as new address

book entry” section (컄page 157).

Adding an SMS sender’s telephone num-

ber to an existing address book entry

왘Press n  “Save Number”  “Add”.

왘Proceed as described in the “Selecting

a number category” paragraph in the

“Adding a telephone number to an ex-

isting address book entry” section

(컄page 154).

Closing an SMS message and returning

to SMS inbox

왘Press n  “Back”.

iIf the SMS message contains telephone

numbers or navigable address data, you can se-

lect this data and place a telephone call or trans-

fer the address data to the navigation system.

iThis function is not possible with all SMS

senders.

iThis function is not possible with all SMS

senders.

159

Control systems

COMAND navigation

왔COMAND navigation

Safety precautions

Warning! G

For safety reasons, only enter a destination

when the vehicle is stationary. When the ve-

hicle is in motion, a passenger should enter

the destination. Study manual and select

route before driving.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-

ly 14 m) every second.

COMAND calculates the route to the desti-

nation without taking account of the follow-

ing, for example:

앫Traffic lights

앫Stop and right-of-way signs

앫Parking or stopping prohibited areas

앫Lane merging

앫Other road and traffic rules and regula-

tions

앫Narrow bridges

COMAND may give incorrect navigation

commands if the data in the digital map

does not correspond with the actual

road/traffic situation. DVD maps do not

cover all areas nor all routes within an area.

For example, if the traffic routing has been

changed or the direction of a one-way road

has been reversed.

For this reason, you must always observe

applicable road and traffic rules and regula-

tions during your journey. Road and traffic

rules and regulations always have priority

over the navigation commands generated by

the system.

Warning! G

Navigation announcements are intended to

direct you while driving without diverting

your attention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of

consulting the map display for directions.

Consulting the symbols or map display for

directions may cause you to divert your at-

tention from driving and increase your risk

of an accident.

160

Control systems

COMAND navigation (introduction)

COMAND navigation (introduc-

tion)

Map software

The digital maps generated by the map

software become outdated in the same

way as conventional road maps. Optimum

route guidance can only be provided by the

navigation system in conjunction with the

most up-to-date map software.

Information about new map software ver-

sions can be obtained from an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

Updating the map software

You can update the map software yourself

using a DVD.

Notes about handling DVDs

앫Only hold discs by the edge.

앫Handle discs carefully to prevent read

problems.

앫Avoid getting scratches, fingerprints

and dust on discs.

앫Use a commercially-available cleaning

cloth to clean discs. Do not wipe them

with a circular motion, but only in

straight lines from the center out-

wards.

앫Place discs back in their boxes after

use.

앫Protect discs from heat and direct sun-

light.

Updating process

The updating process has the following

phases:

앫Loading a DVD into the DVD changer

(컄page 161)

앫Updating process (컄page 161)

iThe updating process can take between

10 and 60 minutes, depending on the size of the

map software. If the radio was switched on be-

fore you started the updating process, you can

still adjust the volume. You can also use

COMAND to operate the automatic air condition-

ing and to cancel the process. Other functions

are not operational.

If possible, carry out the update when the vehicle

is stationary.

iIf you carry out the update with the engine

switched off and the vehicle battery has insuffi-

cient power, COMAND may automatically switch

off during the process in order to protect the bat-

tery. If this occurs, restart the update with the

engine running period. Similarly, if the SmartKey

position is unintentionally switched to 0, restart

the update.

Warning! G

Never leave the engine running in an en-

closed space. The exhaust gases contain

carbon monoxide. Inhaling exhaust gases

constitutes a health hazard and could lead

to loss of consciousness or even death.

161

Control systems

COMAND navigation (introduction)

Loading a DVD into the DVD changer

1Disc slot

2Magazine tray buttons 1 – 6

왘Switch on COMAND (컄page 85).

왘Press one of the magazine tray

buttons 2.

If a disc is loaded, it will be ejected.

왘Take disc out of slot 1.

왘Wait until LED for magazine button 2

which you pressed flashes quickly.

왘Slide DVD into slot 1 with printed side

facing upwards.

COMAND loads the DVD.

Updating

After you have loaded the DVD, you will

see a message to the effect that the disc

does not contain a recognizable audio for-

mat.

왘Confirming message: Press n.

COMAND checks whether the map

software on the DVD is compatible with

the vehicle’s navigation system and

whether it is compatible with the cur-

rent system software.

Map software is compatible with the

navigation system and the current sys-

tem software

COMAND now checks whether the map

data on the DVD is already installed.

Map data is not yet installed

You will see a comparison of the version

statuses in the display and a prompt will

appear asking whether you want to contin-

ue with the update.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “No”, COMAND automati-

cally ejects the DVD and the map data

is not updated.

왘Take DVD out of the slot.

If you select “Yes”, the map data is up-

dated.

iEach magazine tray button 2 indicates the

status of the corresponding magazine tray by

means of an LED.

앫LED off = magazine tray is empty

앫LED constantly lit = magazine tray is loaded

앫LED flashes = CD/DVD changer requesting

disc to be loaded

162

Control systems

COMAND navigation (introduction)

Map data is already installed

You will see a message that the map data

is already installed and a prompt will ap-

pear asking you whether you want to con-

tinue with the update.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “No”, COMAND automati-

cally ejects the DVD and the map data

is not updated.

왘Take DVD out of slot.

If you select “Yes”, the existing map

data is saved again.

Updating the map data

While the update is running, you will see a

message to this effect and a progress bar.

The progress bars fills up from left to right

during the update.

1Progress bar

You can either cancel the update or allow

it to run to the end without canceling.

왘Canceling an update on the DVD

changer: Press corresponding maga-

zine tray button 2 (컄page 161).

The DVD will be ejected in both cases.

왘Take DVD out of slot.

왘To allow the update to run to the

end without canceling: Take no fur-

ther action.

If the update is successfully complet-

ed, you will see a message to this ef-

fect.

왘Confirming message: Press n.

COMAND ejects the DVD.

왘Take DVD out of slot.

The update is complete.

If the update is not successfully complet-

ed, you will see a message that the map

update is not possible.

왘Confirming message: Press n.

COMAND ejects the DVD.

왘Take DVD out of slot.

The update may not be successfully com-

pleted for the following reasons:

앫DVD dirty or scratched

iIf the update is canceled, the navigation sys-

tem remains fully operational with the previous

map data. You can restart the update at a later

date. It will then continue from the point where it

was canceled.

iThe navigation system remains fully opera-

tional with the previous map data.

163

Control systems

COMAND navigation (introduction)

왘Clean DVD.

See the “Notes about handling

DVDs” section (컄page 160).

왘Restart update.

앫Overheating due to excessive tempera-

tures in the vehicle interior

왘Wait until vehicle interior has

cooled down.

왘Restart update.

앫The storage medium (hard disk) inte-

grated in COMAND is defective.

왘Consult an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

Map software is not compatible with

the navigation system

You will see a message that the update is

not possible.

왘Confirming message: Press n.

COMAND ejects the DVD.

왘Take DVD out of slot.

왘Load a DVD which is compatible with

the vehicle’s navigation system.

Map software is not compatible with

the current system software

You will see a message that the system

software and the map software are not

compatible.

왘Confirming message: Press n.

COMAND ejects the DVD.

왘Take DVD out of slot.

왘Have the system software updated at

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

iThe map software cannot be updated until

the system software has been updated.

164

Control systems

COMAND navigation (introduction)

General notes

Operational readiness of the navigation

system following a system software

update by an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center

After a system software update by an au-

thorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the in-

stalled map software may no longer be

compatible. If this is the case, the naviga-

tion system will not be operational.

You will know if this is the case, when the

following message will appear when you

switch to navigation mode: “The system

software has been updated. The map soft-

ware must be updated now. Please insert

the DVD with the map software.”

왘Updating map software: Proceed as

described in the “Updating the map

software” section (컄page 160). Use

map software which is compatible with

the system software.

Initial use or use following a system

software update

In both these cases, the navigation system

must determine the position of the vehicle.

You may have to drive for a while before

precise route guidance is possible.

GPS reception

Correct functioning of the navigation sys-

tem depends on GPS reception, among

other things. In certain situations, GPS re-

ception may be impaired, there may be in-

terference or there may be no reception at

all, e.g. in tunnels, in multistory parking ga-

rage or due to snow on the GPS antenna. If

there is snow on the GPS antenna, you

should remove it. The GPS antenna is at

the back of the vehicle roof.

The roof cargo container* may also impair

mobile phone reception and GPS cover-

age.

Route guidance after vehicle transpor-

tation

COMAND has to redetermine the position

of the vehicle if the vehicle has been trans-

ported (e.g. by ferry, by train or after tow-

ing).

Positioning takes place automatically even

when COMAND is switched off. The dura-

tion varies from one case to another.

Route guidance may be restricted as fol-

lows during vehicle positioning:

앫Navigation announcements, route

guidance displays and displayed street

names are not consistent with the ac-

tual location of the vehicle.

앫COMAND does not generate navigation

announcements.

iPlease note that the update must be allowed

to run to the end in this case. If you interrupt it,

the navigation system will continue to be non-op-

erational.

165

Control systems

COMAND navigation (introduction)

앫Instead of the route guidance displays,

you see the “Off Road” display and a di-

rection arrow. The direction arrow

shows the compass heading to the des-

tination.

When positioning is complete, route guid-

ance is once again possible using naviga-

tion announcements and route guidance

displays.

Interrupting the journey during route

guidance

The following applies if you interrupt the

journey during route guidance and contin-

ue the journey later:

앫COMAND resumes route guidance au-

tomatically if you continue the journey

within 2 hours.

앫Route guidance is canceled if you con-

tinue the journey after more than

2 hours. It will be necessary to resume

the canceled route guidance manually

(컄page 216).

Hard disk errors

COMAND has an integrated hard disk on

which the map software is saved.

If an area of the hard disk has an error,

COMAND can no longer access the map

data in this area, for example, when calcu-

lating a route.

The message “Navigation Unavailable.

Please refer to the operating instructions.”

appears.

왘Deleting message: Switch COMAND

off and back on.

Units of measurement

The units of measurement in navigation

mode are identical to those set in the in-

strument cluster.

Input restrictions

The input restrictions are imposed starting

at a particular vehicle speed. The restric-

tions are canceled as soon as the speed

drops below a certain value.

When the restriction is active, certain oper-

ations or entries are not possible.

You will notice this by the fact that some

menu items cannot be selected or certain

operations will not be possible.

iThe journey is interrupted if you park the ve-

hicle and switch off COMAND.

The journey is continued when you switch

COMAND back on and start driving on.

iIf you switch the navigation system off/on,

it will be operational again until it has to access

the faulty area of the hard disk again. The mes-

sage will then appear again. Consult an autho-

rized Mercedes-Benz Center.

166

Control systems

COMAND navigation (introduction)

Navigation system menu overview

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

Guide Route

(only with route

guidance active)

Position 6

(only with route

guidance active)

Destination Traffic (USA only)1

1Depending on your vehicle’s production date the traffic menu may not be available.

Select a special des-

tination from the cur-

rent map view

앫Call up route info

앫Call up route

browser

앫Call up the de-

tour function

앫Call up the save

position memory

function

앫Center the map

on the vehicle’s

position

앫Center the map

on the destina-

tion position

Repeat the current

navigation an-

nouncement

Select:

앫a destination

앫stopover

앫save destination

앫cancel route

guidance

Call up real-time traf-

fic messages

167

Control systems

COMAND navigation (introduction)

Calling up the map display and switch-

ing to navigation mode

왘Press the N shortcut button once or

twice.

왘In the main function line, select “Navi”.

Both of these will call up the map display.

You will see the map with the menu system

either shown or hidden.

Illustration: map with route guidance inac-

tive and with the menu system shown

1Current vehicle position

Illustration: map with route guidance inac-

tive and with the menu system hidden

(full screen mode)

1Current vehicle position

2Set map orientation (컄page 170)

3Map scale selected (컄page 168)

Hiding or showing the menu system

왘Hiding: Slide qm.

The “Full Screen” menu item appears in

the main area of the display; it is auto-

matically selected.

왘Press n.

The menu system is hidden. The map

can be seen in the full screen.

iThe number of times you have to press the

N shortcut button depends on the operating

mode currently selected.

168

Control systems

COMAND navigation (introduction)

왘Showing: Press n in the full-screen

map display.

Adjusting the map scale

왘Rotate ymz until the desired map

scale is set.

1Currently set map scale as number

2Scale

3Currently set map scale as a needle on

the scale

4Previously set value before calling up

the scale

As soon as you rotate ymz, scale 2

appears. Rotating clockwise zooms in,

rotating counterclockwise zooms out.

Saving current vehicle position as des-

tination in last destinations list

왘Showing menu system, if neces-

sary: Press n.

왘Saving: Select “Position”  “Save Po-

sition”.

COMAND saves the current vehicle po-

sition as a destination in the last desti-

nations (컄page 225).

Moving the map

왘Slide qmr, omp or wmx.

A crosshair appears on the map.

1Crosshair

2Details of the crosshair position

3Map scale

iIt is only possible to adjust the map scale

with the menu system hidden (full-screen map

display).

iIt is only possible to move the map with the

menu system hidden. iDisplay 2 may be the name of a road, for

example, provided the digital map contains the

necessary data.

If no data is available, display 2 shows:

앫the coordinates of the crosshair if the

geo-coordinate display is switched on

(컄page 171) and the GPS signal is strong

enough

앫no display if the geo-coordinate display is

switched off (컄page 171)

169

Control systems

COMAND navigation (introduction)

Adjusting the map scale

왘Rotate ymz.

Rotating clockwise zooms in, rotating

counterclockwise zooms out.

Saving crosshair position as destination

in last destinations list

왘Showing menu system, if neces-

sary: Press n.

왘Saving: Select “Position”  “Save Po-

sition”.

COMAND saves the crosshair position

as a destination in the last destinations

list (컄page 225).

Hiding the crosshair

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

The crosshair disappears and the map

is centered on the vehicle position.

왘Set the map to the vehicle or destina-

tion position, see the explanation be-

low.

Centering the map on the vehicle or

destination position

왘Centering on the vehicle’s position:

Select “Navi”  “Position”  “Vehicle

Position Map”.

왘Press back button L when the

crosshair is displayed.

왘Centering on the destination:

Select “Navi”  “Position”  “Destina-

tion Position Map”.

Basic settings

Map perspective (USA only)

Depending on your vehicle’s production

date the map perspective function may not

be available.

COMAND can display the map from a

bird's eye view or in the normal map view.

왘Select map perspective:

Select “Navi”  “Navi”  “Map Dis-

play”.

The map display list appears. A dot R

indicates the current setting.

왘Select “Bird’s-eye view”.

The bird's eye view is switched on or

off, depending on the previous status.

iIf you have moved the map, you can use this

function to rapidly return the map to the position

of the vehicle or destination. It is only possible to

center the map on the destination position when

route guidance is active.

iYou can make the following settings regard-

less of whether route guidance is active or inac-

tive.

iIf you scroll the map in the bird's eye view,

COMAND switches back to the normal map view.

170

Control systems

COMAND navigation (introduction)

Map orientation

1Current map orientation

The following may be displayed:

앫8 = “Heading Up” (the map is dis-

played so that the direction of travel is

always up; the orange point of the icon

points north)

앫9 = “North Up” (the map view is dis-

played so that north is always up)

왘Setting map orientation:

Select “Navi”  “Navi”  “Map Dis-

play”.

The map display list appears. A dot R

indicates the current setting.

왘Select “North Up” or “Heading Up”.

왘Exiting menu: Slide omp.

The map orientation changes accord-

ingly.

Setting POI symbols

You can set which points of interest (POIs)

should be displayed as symbols in the

map. POIs are garages, hotels, movie the-

aters or restaurants, for example.

The following settings are possible:

앫“Standard symbols” (symbol deter-

mined by the factory settings)

앫“Personal symbols” (you can determine

the symbols yourself)

앫“No symbols”

왘Adjusting: Select “Navi”  “Navi” 

“Map Display”.

The map display list appears. A dot R

indicates the current setting.

왘Select “Standard symbols”, “Personal

symbols” or “No symbols”.

If you select “Personal symbols”, the

list of POIs appears.

왘Switching POI symbol display on

or off: Select the desired POI.

The corresponding symbol displays

are switched on or off, depending

on the previous status. A check-

mark indicates which status is ac-

tive. You can switch on the symbol

displays for more than one POI.

iDepending on the map scale on the map,

POI symbols may not be visible on the map al-

though their display is activated. In addition, POI

symbols may be covered by the map’s labels.

171

Control systems

COMAND navigation (introduction)

왘Exiting menu: Slide omp or press

back button L in the center console

(컄page 86).

Geo-coordinate display

Illustration: map with geo-coordinate dis-

play switched on

1Current height above sea level

2Number of GPS satellites from which

signals for positioning can be received

3Coordinate display

Display options with geo-coordinate dis-

play switched on

If the crosshair is displayed on the map

view (map was moved manually), only dis-

play 3 is visible.

It shows either the coordinates of the

crosshair or other data on the crosshair

position, e.g. a street name. The digital

map must contain relevant data in order

for this other data to be displayed.

Switching the geo-coordinate display on

or off

왘Select “Navi”  “Navi”  “Map Dis-

play”.

The map display list appears.

왘Select “Coordinates”.

The geo-coordinate display is switched

on or off, depending on the previous

status. A checkmark indicates which

status is active.

왘Exiting menu: Slide omp or press

back button L in the center console

(컄page 86).

Setting route type (USA only)

Depending on your vehicle’s production

date the route type function may not be

available.

You can set the following route types:

앫“Fast Route”: COMAND calculates a

route with the shortest possible (mini-

mized) driving time.

iThe list shows all symbols that are contained

in the digital map across all states (USA) and/or

provinces (CDN). Not all POIs in all states (USA)

or in all provinces (CDN) are available, however.

Certain POI symbols may not be displayed on the

map, even if the symbol display is switched on.

iThere must be sufficient GPS reception for

displays 1, 2 and 3 to be shown. Height dis-

play 1 is an approximation because the naviga-

tion system uses the GPS signals for the

calculation.

iIf there is no crosshair on the map view, dis-

plays 1, 2 and 3 are visible. Display 3

shows the coordinates of the current vehicle po-

sition.

172

Control systems

앫“Short Route”: COMAND calculates a route with the shortest possible (minimized) distance taking distance and driving time into

account.

왘Select “Navi”  “Navi”  “Mode”.

The mode list appears. A square 쐍 indi-

cates the current setting.

왘Select route type: “Fast Route” or

“Short Route”.

왘Exit menu: Slide omp or press back

button L in the center console

(컄page 86).

Setting route mode

왘Select “Navi”  “Navi”  “Mode”.

The mode list appears.

왘Switching mode on or off:

Select desired modes.

Depending on the previous status, the

mode is switched on or off. A check-

mark indicates that the mode is

switched on. It is possible to switch on

more than one mode.

왘Exiting menu: Slide omp or press

back button L in the center console

(컄page 86).

COMAND will verify whether it can in-

corporate the modes if you select them

with route guidance active.

If it can, COMAND calculates a new

route while incorporating the modes

selected.

If it cannot, you will see and hear a cor-

responding message.

왘Select “OK”.

COMAND calculates a new route.

Only those modes which can be in-

corporated are used.

iIf you change the route type setting during

active route guidance, COMAND calculates a

new route. If you change the setting when route

guidance is inactive, COMAND uses the new set-

ting for the next route guidance.

iThis function allows you to set the following

options for route guidance:

앫“Minimize Highways”

앫“Minimize Toll Roads”

앫“Minimize Tunnels”

앫“Minimize Ferries/Motorail”

173

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

COMAND navigation system

(entering a destination)

The following destination entry options are

available:

앫Entering a destination by address

앫Entering a destination from the desti-

nation memory

앫Entering a destination from the list of

last destinations

앫Entering a destination from the map

앫Entering a stopover

앫Entering a POI

Entering a destination by the address

To enter an address you may proceed as

follows:

앫Enter state (USA) or province (CDN),

street and town/city

앫Enter state (USA) or province (CDN),

town/city and street

앫Enter state (USA) or province (CDN),

town/city and center

앫Enter state (USA) or province (CDN),

zip code and center

앫Enter state (USA) or province (CDN),

zip code and street

Calling up the address input menu

왘Select “Navi”  “Destination”  “Ad-

dress Entry”.

The address input menu appears. It

shows a state (USA) or a province

(CDN). Which state or province is

shown depends on the vehicle’s loca-

tion.

1State (USA) or province (CDN)

Warning! G

For safety reasons, only enter a new desti-

nation when the vehicle is stationary.

iIt is possible to enter a destination regard-

less of whether route guidance is active or inac-

tive.

iIt is not possible to enter an address when

the vehicle has exceeded a certain speed. As

soon as the vehicle speed drops below a certain

value, the function is available again.

iIf Russian or Chinese is set as the system

language, the address must be entered using

Latin letters. Setting the system language

(컄page 240).

iAs additional information to the street entry,

you can enter either a house number or an inter-

section.

A zip code entry replaces the town/city entry.

컄컄

174

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

Menu items in the address input menu

Some menu items will not or not yet be

available, depending on the sequence in

which you enter the address and the data

version.

Example: If you have not made any entries,

menu items “House No.”, “Center”, “Inter-

section”, “POI”, “Start” and “Save” will not

yet be available. And the “Zip Code” menu

item will not be available if the digital map

does not contain any zip codes.

Entering a state (USA)

왘In the address input menu, select

“State/Prov”  “States (U.S.)”.

A list of states appears with input char-

acters; the input characters are auto-

matically activated.

List of states with input characters

1Top list entry based on the input data

up to that point

2Characters entered by the user

3Characters automatically added by the

system

4Clear last character entry

5Currently selectable characters

6Currently non-selectable characters

7Input characters

8List of states

9Currently selected characters

While the numbers are being selected as

described below, the top list entry 1 al-

ways shows the state which best corre-

sponds to the input data as it has been

entered up to that point.

At the same time, COMAND automatically

supplements characters 2 entered by the

user with other likely input characters 3.

왘Selecting characters: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming character selection:

Press n.

왘Deleting individual characters:

Select ) in the bottom line and

press n.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in

the bottom line and press n until the

entire entry is deleted.

iYou can only enter those states which are

saved on the digital map.

iIn the list of input characters 7, you can

only select currently selectable characters.

Which characters are included depends on the

sequence in which you have entered your desti-

nation and the data version of the digital map.

컄컄

175

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

왘Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in

the bottom line and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute

the characters entered to a state, the input

characters 7 disappear automatically.

You see the list of states without the input

characters. Here you can confirm the cur-

rent entry or make another selection.

During character entry, you can also man-

ually switch to the list of states without in-

put characters at any time.

왘Switching manually to list of states

without input characters: Slide qm.

왘Select ? in the second line from the

bottom and press n.

List of states without input characters

왘Selecting a state: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Canceling selection: Select “Back” by

sliding om and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

The address input menu appears again.

It shows the abbreviation for the se-

lected state.

The following menu items are now avail-

able:

앫“Map”: Entering a destination from the

map (컄page 194)

앫“State/Prov”: Re-enter state (USA) or

province (CDN)

앫“Town”: Entering a town or city

(컄page 179)

앫“Street”: Entering a street

(컄page 181)

앫“Zip Code”: Entering the zip code

(컄page 177)

왘Continuing destination entry:

Select one of the menu items men-

tioned above.

iIt is not possible to enter zip codes if the dig-

ital map does not contain any zip codes for the

selected state.

176

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

Entering a province (Canada)

왘In the address input menu, select

“State/Prov”  “Provinces (Canada)”.

A list of provinces appears.

왘Select desired province.

The address input menu appears again.

It shows the abbreviation for the se-

lected province.

The following menu items are now avail-

able:

앫“Map”: Entering a destination from the

map (컄page 194)

앫“State/Prov”: Re-enter state (USA) or

province (CDN)

앫“Town”: Entering a town or city

(컄page 179)

앫“Street”: Entering a street

(컄page 181)

앫“Zip Code”: Entering the zip code

(컄page 177)

왘Continuing destination entry:

Select one of the menu items men-

tioned above.

Quick access to most recently entered

states (USA) or provinces (CDN)

왘In the address input menu, select

“State/Prov”  “Last States/Provinc-

es”.

The list of most recently entered states

(USA) or provinces (CDN) appears. The

last entry is at the top of the list.

왘Select desired state (USA) or desired

province (CDN).

The address input menu appears again.

It shows the abbreviation for the se-

lected state (USA) or province (CDN).

The following menu items are now avail-

able:

앫“Map”: Entering a destination from the

map (컄page 194)

앫“State/Prov”: Re-enter state (USA) or

province (CDN)

앫“Town”: Entering a town or city

(컄page 179)

앫“Street”: Entering a street

(컄page 181)

앫“Zip Code”: Entering the zip code

(컄page 177)

왘Continuing destination entry:

Select one of the menu items men-

tioned above.

iIt is not possible to enter a zip code if the

digital map does not contain any zip codes for

the selected province (CDN).

iIt is not possible to enter a zip code if the

digital map does not contain any zip codes for

the selected state (USA) or province (CDN).

177

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

Entering the zip code

왘In the address input menu, select “Zip

Code”. A list of zip codes appears with

input characters; the input

characters 4 are automatically acti-

vated.

List of zip codes with input characters

1Top list entry based on the input data

up to that point

2Numbers entered by the user

3Numbers automatically added by the

system

4Input characters

5Currently selectable numbers

6Currently selected numbers

7Currently non-selectable numbers

8List of zip codes

While the numbers are being selected as

described below, the top list entry 1 al-

ways shows the zip code which best corre-

sponds to the input data as it has been

entered up to that point.

At the same time, COMAND automatically

supplements numbers 2 entered by the

user with other likely numbers 3.

왘Selecting numbers: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming number selection:

Press n.

왘Deleting individual numbers:

Select ) in the bottom line and

press n.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in

the bottom line and press n until the

entire entry is deleted.

iIt is not possible to enter a zip code if you

have already entered other address data aside

from the state (USA) or province (CDN).

You can only enter those zip codes which are

saved on the digital map.

The available zip codes depend on the state

(USA) or province (CDN) most recently entered.

iIn the list of input characters 4, you can

only select numbers which can be currently en-

tered. Which characters are included depends

on the sequence in which you have entered your

destination and the data version of the digital

map.

178

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

왘Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in

the bottom line and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute

the numbers entered to a zip code, input

characters 4 disappear. You see the list

of zip codes without the input characters.

Here you can confirm the current entry or

make another selection.

During character entry, you can also man-

ually switch to the list of zip codes without

input characters at any time.

왘Switching manually to list of zip

codes without input characters:

Slide qm.

왘Select ? in the second line from the

bottom and press n.

List of zip codes without input

characters

왘Selecting a zip code: Slide qmr or ro-

tate ymz.

왘Canceling selection: Select “Back”

and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

You will see the address input menu

again.

It shows one of the following items of infor-

mation:

앫Street and if necessary, house number,

town/city, state (USA) or province

(CDN)

앫Town/city, state (USA) or province

(CDN) and zip code

앫State (USA) or province (CDN) and zip

code

Which of the following menu items are now

available depends on the situation, or may

depend on the data version of the digital

map. The menu items which are not avail-

able cannot be selected.

앫“Map”: Using the map to enter a desti-

nation (컄page 194)

iThe street and, if necessary, the house num-

ber, will then appear as soon as COMAND can at-

tribute the zip code to an appropriate address.

iIn this case, using the map for destination

entry is based on the town or city seen in the ad-

dress input menu.

179

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

앫“Street”: entering a street

(컄page 181)

앫“Center”: entering a center

(컄page 184)

앫“POI”: entering a point of interest

(컄page 197)

앫“Save”: saving a destination in the des-

tination memory (컄page 219)

앫“Start”: starting the route calculation

(컄page 191)

왘Continuing or completing destina-

tion entry: Select one of the menu

items mentioned above.

Entering a town or city

왘In the address input menu, select

“Town”.

The list of towns/cities appears either

with or without the input characters

(컄page 180).

Whether or not the input characters ap-

pear depends on how many towns or

cities are available for the desired state

(USA) or province (CDN).

List of towns or cities with input

characters

When this list appears, the input charac-

ters 4 are automatically activated.

1Top list entry based on the input data

up to that point

2Characters entered by the user

3Characters automatically added by the

system

4Input characters

5Currently non-selectable characters

6Currently selectable character

7List of towns/cities

8Currently selected character

iIn this case, entering a POI is based on the

town or city seen in the address input menu.

iYou can only enter those towns or cities

which are saved on the digital map.

It is not possible to enter a town or city when you

have already entered a street which COMAND

can clearly attribute to a town or city.

If COMAND cannot clearly attribute a previously

entered street to a town/city, only those towns

or cities are available which have a street of that

name.

If you have not yet entered a street before enter-

ing the town or city, towns or cities within the

state (USA) or province (CDN) previously en-

tered are available.

180

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

The top list entry 1 at first shows either

the town or city in which the vehicle is cur-

rently located or the town or city which

best corresponds to the input data as it

has been entered up to that point.

As soon as you enter a character from in-

put characters 4, the top list entry 1

shows the town or city that best corre-

sponds to the input data as it has been en-

tered up to that point.

At the same time, COMAND automatically

supplements characters 2 entered by the

user with appropriate characters 3.

왘Selecting characters: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming character selection:

Press n.

왘Deleting individual characters:

Select ) in the bottom line and

press n.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in

the bottom line and press n until the

entire entry is deleted.

왘Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in

the bottom line and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute

the characters entered to a town or city,

the input characters 4 disappear auto-

matically. You see the list of towns or cities

without the input characters. Here you can

confirm the current entry or make another

selection.

During character entry, you can also man-

ually switch to the list of towns/cities with-

out input characters at any time.

왘Switching manually to the list of

towns/cities without input charac-

ters: Slide qm.

왘Select ? in the second line from the

bottom and press n.

List of towns/cities without input

characters

1Symbol for more selection options

iIn the list of input characters 4, you can

only select currently selectable characters.

Which characters are included depends on the

sequence in which you have entered your desti-

nation and the data version of the digital map.

iThe current town or city is shown if:

앫you have accepted the current state (USA) or

province (CDN) when entering the state

(USA) or province (CDN)

앫and if you select town/city entry immediate-

ly afterward

181

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

왘Selecting a town or city: Slide qmr

or rotate ymz.

왘Canceling selection: Select “Back”

and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

Towns/cities with symbol 1 mean

that there is more than one in the se-

lected state (USA) or province (CDN).

Confirming one of these towns/cities

will take you to a further sub-selection.

If there are no other selection options,

the address input menu appears again.

It shows one of the following items of infor-

mation:

앫Town/city and state (USA) or province

(CDN)

앫Street, town/city and state (USA) or

province (CDN)

Which of the following menu items are now

available depends on the situation, or may

depend on the data version of the digital

map. The menu items which are not avail-

able cannot be selected.

앫“Map”: using the map to enter a desti-

nation (컄page 194)

앫“Street”: entering the street

(컄page 181)

앫“House No.”: entering the house num-

ber (컄page 186)

앫“Center”: entering the center

(컄page 184)

앫“Intersection”: entering the intersec-

tion (컄page 189)

앫“POI”: entering a point of interest

(컄page 197)

앫“Save”: saving a destination in the des-

tination memory (컄page 219)

앫“Start”: starting the route calculation

(컄page 191)

왘Continuing or completing destina-

tion entry: Select one of the menu

items mentioned above.

Entering a street

iThe street is visible if you have entered it be-

fore entering the town or city.

iIn this case, using the map for destination

entry is based on the town or city seen in the ad-

dress input menu.

iIn this case, entering a POI is based on the

town or city seen in the address input menu.

iIt is not possible to enter a street if:

앫you have already entered a center

앫you have already entered a zip code that

COMAND can clearly attribute to a street

컄컄

182

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

왘In the address input menu, select

“Street”.

The list of streets appears either with

or without the input characters

(컄page 183). Whether or not the input

characters appear depends on how

many streets are available for the se-

lected town or city.

Street list with input characters

When this list appears, the input charac-

ters 6 are automatically activated.

1Top list entry based on the input data

up to that point

2Characters entered by the user

3Characters automatically added by the

system

4Currently non-selectable characters

5Currently selectable character

6Input characters

7Street list

8Currently selected character

The top list entry 1 first shows the street

first alphabetically and best corresponds

to the input data as it has been entered up

to that point.

As soon as you enter a character from in-

put characters 6, the top list entry 1

shows the street which best corresponds

to the input data as it has been entered up

to that point.

At the same time, COMAND automatically

supplements characters 2 entered by the

user with appropriate characters 3.

왘Selecting characters: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming character selection:

Press n.

왘Deleting individual characters:

Select ) in the bottom line and

press n.

iYou can only enter those streets which are

saved on the digital map.

If you have not entered a town or city before en-

tering the street, only those streets within the

state (USA) or province (CDN) previously en-

tered are available. If you have already entered a

town or city, streets within that town or city are

available.

If you have entered a zip code before entering

the street, only those streets within the zip code

area are available.

iIn the list of input characters 6, you can

only select currently selectable characters.

Which characters are included depends on the

sequence in which you have entered your desti-

nation and the data version of the digital map.

컄컄

183

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in

the bottom line and press n until the

entire entry is deleted.

왘Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in

the bottom line and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute

the characters entered to a street, the in-

put characters 6 disappear. You see the

street list without the input characters.

Here you can confirm the current entry or

make another selection.

During character entry, you can also man-

ually switch to the street list without input

characters at any time.

왘Switching manually to the street list

without input characters: Slide qm.

왘Select ? in the second line from the

bottom and press n.

Street list without input characters

1Symbol for more selection options

왘Selecting a street: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Canceling selection: Select “Back”

and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

Streets with symbol 1 run through

several suburbs. Confirming one of

these streets takes you to a further

sub-selection.

If there are no other selection options,

the address input menu appears again

after the confirmation.

It shows one of the following items of infor-

mation:

앫Street and state (USA) or province

(CDN)

앫Street, town/city and state (USA) or

province (CDN)

Which of the following menu items are now

available depends on the situation, or may

depend on the data version of the digital

map. The menu items which are not avail-

able cannot be selected.

앫“Map”: using the map to enter a desti-

nation (컄page 194)

iThe town or city is visible if you have entered

it before entering the street, or if COMAND can

clearly attribute the street entered to a town or

city.

iIn this case, using the map for destination

entry is based on the town or city seen in the ad-

dress input menu.

184

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

앫“House No.”: entering the house num-

ber (컄page 186)

앫“Intersection”: entering the intersec-

tion (컄page 189)

앫“POI”: entering a point of interest

(컄page 197)

앫“Save”: saving a destination in the des-

tination memory (컄page 219)

앫“Start”: starting the route calculation

(컄page 191)

왘Continuing or completing destina-

tion entry: Select one of the menu

items mentioned above.

Entering a center

왘In the address input menu, select “Cen-

ter”.

The list of centers appears either with

or without the input characters

(컄page 185). Whether or not the input

characters appear depends on how

many centers are available in the se-

lected town or city.

List of centers with input characters

When this list appears, the input charac-

ters 7 are automatically activated.

1Top list entry based on the input data

up to that point

2Characters entered by the user

3Characters automatically added by the

system

4Currently non-selectable characters

5Currently selectable character

6Currently selected character

7Input characters

8List of centers

iEntering an intersection is restricted to

streets within the vicinity of the street entered.

iIn this case, entering a POI is based on the

town or city seen in the address input menu.

iIt is not possible to enter a center if:

앫you have not yet entered a town or city

앫you have already entered a street

앫you have already entered a zip code that

COMAND can clearly attribute to an address

You can only enter those centers which are

saved on the digital map.

Depending on the previous entry, centers are

available either for the town/city entered or the

zip code area entered.

185

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

While the characters are being selected as

described below, the top list entry 1 al-

ways shows the center which best corre-

sponds to the input data as it has been

entered up to that point.

At the same time, COMAND automatically

supplements characters 2 entered by the

user with appropriate characters 3.

왘Selecting characters: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming character selection:

Press n.

왘Deleting individual characters:

Select ) in the bottom line and

press n.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in

the bottom line and press n until the

entire entry is deleted.

왘Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in

the bottom line and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute

the characters entered to a center, the in-

put characters 7 disappear. You see the

list of centers without the input characters.

Here you can confirm the current entry or

make another selection.

During character entry, you can also man-

ually switch to the list of centers without

input characters at any time.

왘Switching manually to the list of

centers without input characters:

Slide qm.

왘Select ? in the second line from the

bottom and press n.

List of centers without input characters

왘Selecting a center: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Canceling selection: Select “Back”

and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

After the confirmation, the address in-

put menu appears again. It shows the

center, town/city and state (USA) or

province (CDN).

iIn the list of input characters 7, you can

only select currently selectable characters.

Which characters are included depends on the

sequence in which you have entered your desti-

nation and the data version of the digital map.

컄컄

186

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

Which of the following menu items are now

available may depend on the data version

of the digital map. The menu items which

are not available cannot be selected.

앫“Map”: using the map to enter a desti-

nation (컄page 194)

앫“POI”: entering a point of interest

(컄page 197)

앫“Save”: saving a destination in the des-

tination memory (컄page 219)

앫“Start”: starting the route calculation

(컄page 191)

왘Continuing or completing destina-

tion entry: Select one of the menu

items mentioned above.

Entering a house number

How the house number is entered depends

on whether you have already entered just

the street or both the street and the town

or city (컄page 187).

With only the street entered previously

When COMAND can clearly allocate the

street to a town or city, the house number

appears without input characters. Select a

house number from the list (컄page 189).

When COMAND cannot clearly allocate the

street to a town or city, a house number

screen appears. You can now enter a

house number.

1Numbers entered by the user

2Input characters

3Currently selected number

왘Selecting numbers: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming number selection:

Press n.

왘Deleting individual numbers:

Select ) in the bottom line and

press n.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in

the bottom line and press n until the

entire entry is deleted.

iIn this case, using the map for destination

entry is based on the center seen in the address

input menu.

iIn this case, entering a point of interest is

based on the center seen in the address input

menu.

iThe house number can only be entered after

the street has been entered.

You can only enter those house numbers which

are saved on the digital map. The digital map

does not contain all house numbers for all

streets.

컄컄

187

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

왘Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in

the bottom line and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

왘Confirming entry: Select ? in the

second line from the bottom and

press n.

If COMAND cannot clearly attribute the

house number to a town or city, the

town/city input menu appears.

왘Entering town: Proceed as de-

scribed in the “Entering a town or

city” section (컄page 179).

After the town or city has been en-

tered, the address input menu ap-

pears again.

If COMAND can clearly attribute the

house number to a town or city, the ad-

dress input menu also appears.

In both cases, the address input menu

shows the house number, street,

town/city and state (USA) or province

(CDN).

Which of the following menu items are now

available may depend on the data version

of the digital map. The menu items which

are not available cannot be selected.

앫“Map”: using the map to enter a desti-

nation (컄page 194)

앫“POI”: entering a point of interest

(컄page 197)

앫“Save”: saving a destination in the des-

tination memory (컄page 219)

앫“Start”: starting the route calculation

(컄page 191)

왘Continuing or completing destina-

tion entry: Select one of the menu

items mentioned above.

With the street and town/city previously

entered

왘In the address input menu, select

“House No.”.

The list of house numbers appears ei-

ther with or without the input charac-

ters (컄page 189). Whether or not the

input characters appear depends on

how many house numbers are available

in the selected street.

iIn this case, using the map for destination

entry is based on the town or city seen in the ad-

dress input menu.

iIn this case, entering a POI is based on the

town or city seen in the address input menu.

188

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

List of house numbers with input

characters

When this list appears, the input charac-

ters 4 are automatically activated.

1Numbers entered by the user

2Numbers automatically added by the

system

3Top list entry based on the input data

up to that point

4Input characters

5Currently non-selectable numbers

6Currently selected number

7Currently selectable numbers

8List of house numbers

While the numbers are being selected as

described below, the top list entry 3 al-

ways shows the house number which best

corresponds to the input data as it has

been entered up to that point.

At the same time, COMAND automatically

supplements numbers 1 entered by the

user with appropriate numbers 2.

왘Selecting numbers: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming number selection:

Press n.

왘Deleting individual numbers:

Select ) in the bottom line and

press n.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in

the bottom line and press n until the

entire entry is deleted.

왘Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in

the bottom line and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute

the numbers entered to a house number,

the input characters 4 disappear. You see

the list of house numbers without the input

characters. Here you can confirm the cur-

rent entry or make another selection.

During number entry, you can also manual-

ly switch to the list of house numbers with-

out input characters at any time.

왘Switching manually to the list of

house numbers without input char-

acters: Slide qm.

왘Select ? in the second line from the

bottom and press n.

iIn the list of input characters 4, you can

only select currently selectable characters.

Which characters are included depends on the

sequence in which you have entered your desti-

nation and the data version of the digital map.

189

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

List of house numbers without input

characters

왘Selecting house numbers:

Slide qmr or rotate ymz.

왘Canceling selection: Select “Back”

and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

After the confirmation, the address in-

put menu appears again. It shows the

house number, street, town/city and

state (USA) or province (CDN).

Which of the following menu items are now

available may depend on the data version

of the digital map. The menu items which

are not available cannot be selected.

앫“Map”: using the map to enter a desti-

nation (컄page 194)

앫“POI”: entering a point of interest

(컄page 197)

앫“Save”: saving a destination in the des-

tination memory (컄page 219)

앫“Start”: starting the route calculation

(컄page 191)

왘Continuing or completing destina-

tion entry: Select one of the menu

items mentioned above.

Entering an intersection

왘In the address input menu, select “In-

tersection”.

The list of intersections appears either

with or without the input characters

(컄page 191). Whether or not the input

characters appear depends on how

many intersections are available for the

selected street.

iIn this case, using the map for destination

entry is based on the town or city seen in the ad-

dress input menu.

iIn this case, entering a POI is based on the

town or city seen in the address input menu.

iThe intersection can only be entered after

the street has been entered.

You can only enter those intersections which are

saved on the digital map.

190

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

List of intersections with input

characters

When this list appears, the input charac-

ters 4 are automatically activated.

1Top list entry based on the input data

up to that point

2Characters entered by the user

3Characters automatically added by the

system

4Input characters

5Currently non-selectable characters

6Currently selectable character

7List of intersections

8Currently selected character

While the characters are being selected as

described below, the top list entry 1 al-

ways shows the intersection which best

corresponds to the input data as it has

been entered up to that point.

At the same time, COMAND automatically

supplements characters 2 entered by the

user with appropriate characters 3.

왘Selecting characters: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming character selection:

Press n.

왘Deleting individual characters:

Select ) in the bottom line and

press n.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in

the bottom line and press n until the

entire entry is deleted.

왘Canceling character entry:

Select “Back” in the bottom line and

press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute

the characters entered to an intersection,

the input characters 4 disappear. You see

the list of intersections without the input

characters. Here you can confirm the cur-

rent entry or make another selection.

During character entry, you can also man-

ually switch to the list of intersections

without input characters at any time.

왘Switching manually to the list of in-

tersections without input charac-

ters: Slide qm.

왘Select ? in the second line from the

bottom and press n.

iIn the list of input characters 4, you can

only select currently selectable characters.

Which characters are included depends on the

sequence in which you have entered your desti-

nation and the data version of the digital map.

191

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

List of intersections without input

characters

왘Selecting an intersection: Slide qmr

or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

Either the address input menu appears

again, or the town/city input menu.

왘Canceling selection: Select “Back”

and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

왘If the town/city input menu ap-

pears: Enter a town or city.

After the town or city has been entered,

the address input menu appears again.

Which of the following menu items are now

available may depend on the data version

of the digital map. The menu items which

are not available cannot be selected.

앫“Map”: using the map to enter a desti-

nation (컄page 194)

앫“POI”: entering a point of interest

(컄page 197)

앫“Save”: saving a destination in the des-

tination memory (컄page 219)

앫“Start”: starting the route calculation

왘Continuing or completing destina-

tion entry: Select one of the menu

items mentioned above.

Starting the route calculation

왘After entering the destination, select

“Start”.

The route calculation will start if route

guidance has not already been activat-

ed.

If route guidance has already been ac-

tivated, a prompt will appear asking

whether you want to end the current

route guidance.

iThe town/city input menu appears if the in-

tersection entered cannot be clearly attributed

to a town or city.

iA detailed description of how to enter a town

or city can be found in the “Entering a town or

city” section (컄page 179).

iIn this case, using the map for destination

entry is based on the town or city seen in the ad-

dress input menu.

iIn this case, entering a POI is based on the

town or city seen in the address input menu.

iYou cannot start the route calculation until

all the necessary address data has been en-

tered.

192

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes”, COMAND will stop

the route guidance and start the route

calculation for the new destination.

If you select “No”, COMAND will con-

tinue with the active route guidance.

The new destination is discarded.

During the route calculation, an arrow

will indicate the linear direction to the

destination. Below this, you will see the

message “Calculating Route”.

Once the route has been calculated,

route guidance begins (컄page 208).

Entering a destination from the

destination memory

왘Select “Navi”  “Destination” 

“From Memory”.

The destination memory list appears ei-

ther with or without the input charac-

ters (컄page 193). Whether the input

characters appear depends on the

number of entries in the destination

memory.

Destination memory list with input

characters

When this list appears, the input charac-

ters 4 are automatically activated.

1Top list entry based on the input data

up to that point

2Characters entered by the user

3Characters automatically added by the

system

4Input characters

5Currently non-selectable characters

6Destination memory list

7Currently selected character

8Currently selectable characters

iRoute calculation requires a certain amount

of time. The time depends on the distance from

the destination, for example.

COMAND calculates the route using the digital

map data. The calculated route may differ from

the actual road situation, e.g. due to road con-

struction or incomplete map data. Please make

sure that you observe the notes about the digital

map (컄page 160).

iThe destination memory always contains an

entry called “My Address”. You can save your

home address, for example, under this entry

(컄page 219).

iIn the list of input characters 4, you can

only select currently selectable characters.

Which characters are included depends on the

sequence in which you have entered your desti-

nation and the content of the destination

memory.

193

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

While the characters are being selected as

described below, the top list entry 1 al-

ways shows the destination which best

corresponds to the input data as it has

been entered up to that point.

At the same time, COMAND automatically

supplements characters 2 entered by the

user with appropriate characters 3.

왘Changing language for the input

characters: Select !.

왘Select desired language.

왘Changing character set for the input

characters: Select #.

Depending on the previous setting, you

will change to letters with special char-

acters or to numbers with special char-

acters.

왘Selecting characters: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming character selection:

Press n.

왘Deleting individual characters:

Select ) in the bottom line and

press n.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in

the bottom line and press n until the

entire entry is deleted.

왘Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in

the bottom line and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute

the characters entered to a destination,

the input characters 4 disappear.

You see the destination memory list with-

out input characters. Here you can confirm

the current entry or make another selec-

tion.

You can also manually switch to the desti-

nation memory list without input charac-

ters at any time.

왘Switching manually to the destina-

tion memory list without input char-

acters: Slide qm.

왘Select ? in the second line from the

bottom and press n.

Destination memory list without input

characters

왘Selecting a destination: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Canceling selection: Press back but-

ton L in the center console

(컄page 86).

194

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

왘Select “Back” and press n.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Starting route calculation:

Select “Start”, see also (컄page 191).

Entering a destination from the list of

last destinations

왘Select “Navi”  “Destination” 

“From Last Destinations”.

The list of last destinations appears.

The most recent destination is at the

top of the list.

왘Select desired destination.

왘Starting route calculation:

Select “Start”, see also (컄page 191).

Entering a destination from the map

Calling up the map

왘In the address input menu, select

“Map” (컄page 173).

You will see the map with a crosshair.

The map is set to the address set in the

address input menu.

왘Select “Navi”  “Destination” 

“Via Map”.

You will see the map with a crosshair.

1Crosshair

2Details of the crosshair position

3Map scale

iThe “Back” menu item is only present if this

list was called up from the list with input charac-

ters.

iDepending on the factory settings of the ve-

hicle, it may not be possible to enter a destina-

tion while the vehicle exceeds a preset speed. As

soon as the vehicles speed drops to below the

preset speed, the function is available again.

You can enter a destination via the map if the dig-

ital map does not contain the address of the des-

tination, but the destination must be within the

area of the digital map.

iDisplay 2 may be the name of a road, for

example, provided the digital map contains the

necessary data.

If no data is available, display 2 shows:

앫the coordinates if the geo-coordinate display

is switched on (컄page 171)

앫no display if the geo-coordinate display is

switched off (컄page 171)

195

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)

Moving the map and selecting the des-

tination

왘Moving map: Slide qmr, omp or

wmx.

왘Adjusting map scale: Rotate ymz.

Rotating clockwise enlarges the map,

rotating counterclockwise reduces it.

왘Selecting a destination: Press n.

If the crosshair is located off the edge

of the digital map, a route cannot be

calculated to this destination and you

will see the message “The destination is

located off the map.”.

왘Select “OK”.

왘Move the map and select a destination

again.

If the destination is within the limits of

the digital map, COMAND attempts to

attribute the destination to the map,

which can take approximately

2 seconds.

If the destination can be attributed, you

will see the address of the destination.

If not, you will see the display “Destina-

tion from map”.

왘Starting route calculation:

Select “Start”, see also (컄page 191).

Entering a stopover

Entering predefined destinations

왘Select “Navi”  “Destination” 

“Stopover”.

If a stopover has already been entered,

you can change it.

왘Changing: Select “Change Stop-

over”.

You can now select a category.

왘Selecting a category:

Select category, e.g. “Gas station”.

COMAND first looks for destinations

within the immediate vicinity of the ve-

hicle and near the vehicle’s route. If

there are no destinations available

there, COMAND searches for destina-

tions in an area around the vehicle po-

sition.

If COMAND does not find any destina-

tions, you will see a message to this ef-

fect.

왘Select “OK”.

You can now select a different

category.

iWhen route guidance is active, you can en-

ter a stopover. Stopovers can be predefined des-

tinations from the following predefined

categories:

앫“Mercedes-Benz Center”

앫“Hospital”

앫“Gas station”

앫“Parking lot”

앫“Restaurant”

However, you can also enter destinations other

than the predefined ones.

iYou can use the stopover function to influ-

ence the route guidance calculation to the main

destination. When you have reached your stop-

over, COMAND automatically calculates the

route to the main destination.

196

Control systems

If COMAND finds destinations, you will see a list of the destinations and details of how far away they are in the right-hand side of

the display. The information about how

far away the destinations are can take

a few seconds to be displayed.

The left-hand part of the display shows

the destinations on the map. The desti-

nation marked in the list is highlighted

in the map.

왘Selecting a destination: Select the

desired destination from list.

The address of the destination ap-

pears.

왘Starting route calculation:

Select “Start”, see also (컄page 191).

Entering another destination as a stop-

over

왘Select “Navi”  “Destination” 

“Stopover”.

왘Entering: Select “Other”.

You can select between the following

menu items:

앫“Address Entry”

앫“From Memory”

앫“From Last Destinations”

앫“From POIs”

왘Select a menu item.

Subsequent destination entries may differ,

depending on your selection:

앫“Address Entry” selection:

왘Enter a destination by address

(컄page 173).

앫“From Memory” selection:

왘Enter a destination from the desti-

nation memory (컄page 192).

앫“From Last Destinations” selection:

왘Enter a destination from the list of

last destinations (컄page 194).

앫“From POIs” selection:

왘Enter a special destination

(컄page 197).

왘Starting route calculation: After

entering a destination, select “Start”

(컄page 191).

Changing a stopover

If a stopover has already been entered, you

can change it.

왘Select “Navi”  “Destination” 

“Stopover”  “Change Stopover”.

왘Enter another destination as a stop-

over.

Deleting the stopover

If a stopover has already been entered, you

can delete it.

왘Select “Navi”  “Destination” 

“Stopover”  “Delete Stopover”.

COMAND deletes the stopover and cal-

culates the route to the main destina-

tion.

197

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)

COMAND navigation system

(Point of interest entry)

Entering a POI in the surrounding area

왘In the map view while the menu system

is displayed, select “Destination” 

“From POIs”  “Current Position”

(컄page 167).

왘Continue with designating the POI cat-

egory (컄page 198).

Entering a POI in the surroundings of a

given town

Option 1

왘In the map view while the menu system

is displayed, select “Destination” 

“From POIs”  “Other Town”

(컄page 167).

왘If necessary, enter state (USA)

(컄page 174) or province (CDN)

(컄page 174).

왘Entering town: Select “Town”.

The town/city input menu appears.

왘Then proceed as described in the “En-

tering a town or city” section

(컄page 179).

왘After entering the town or city, contin-

ue with designating the POI category

(컄page 198).

Option 2

왘Enter an address in the address input

menu (컄page 173).

왘Select “POI”.

왘Continue with designating the POI cat-

egory (컄page 198).

Entering a POI in a different region

왘In the map view while the menu system

is displayed, select “Destination” 

“From POIs”  “Global POI”

(컄page 167).

The category list appears. The state

(USA) or province (CDN) currently se-

lected is shown in the first list entry.

iThis function gives you quick access to POIs

which are of national interest in the state (USA)

or province (CDN) you have selected. The follow-

ing categories may be available:

앫“AIRPORT”

앫“BORDER CROSSING”

앫“HIGHWAY ACCESS”

Not all categories are available in all states (USA)

or provinces (CDN).

198

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)

왘Selecting another state (USA) or

province (CDN): Select the first list

entry.

A list of states/provinces appears.

왘Select desired state (USA) or province

(CDN).

If there are no POIs for the selected

state (USA) or province (CDN), you will

see a corresponding message.

왘Closing message: Select “OK”.

You can again select a state (prov-

ince).

If there are POIs, you will see the cate-

gory list again.

왘Proceed as described in the “Selecting

a category” paragraph in the “Main cat-

egory list without input characters”

section (컄page 200).

Designating a POI category

The categories and POIs available depend

on the distance from the vehicle position

you have set for the POI.

앫POI in the surrounding area:

categories sorted alphabetically and

POIs sorted by distance within a radius

of about 12 mi around the vehicle posi-

tion are available. You can extend the

search radius using the list options

(컄page 203).

앫POI within a given town:

If you have only entered the state (USA)

or province (CDN) and the town or city,

alphabetically sorted categories and al-

phabetically sorted POIs within the

town/city are available.

If you have entered more than the state

(USA) or province (CDN) and the town

or city, alphabetically sorted categories

and POIs sorted by distance within a

radius of about 12 mi around the ad-

dress entered are available.

You can extend the search radius and

the category selection using the list op-

tions (컄page 203).

앫POIs in a different region:

Alphabetically sorted categories and

alphabetically sorted POIs are avail-

able.

Entering a category

Depending on the number of available cat-

egories, the main category list appears for

category entry either with or without input

characters (컄page 200).

199

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)

Main category list with input characters

When this list appears, the input charac-

ters 5 are automatically activated.

1Top list entry based on the input data

up to that point

2Characters entered by the user

3Characters automatically added by the

system

4Symbol for available POIs or other

available subcategories

5Input characters

6Currently non-selectable characters

7Currently selectable character

8Currently selected character

9Main category list

While the characters are being selected as

described below, the top list entry 1 al-

ways shows the category which best corre-

sponds to the input data as it has been

entered up to that point.

At the same time, COMAND automatically

supplements characters 2 entered by the

user with appropriate characters 3.

왘Selecting characters: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming character selection:

Press n.

왘Deleting individual characters:

Select ) in the bottom line and

press n.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in

the bottom line and press n until the

entire entry is deleted.

왘Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in

the bottom line and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute

the characters entered to a category, the

input characters 5 disappear.

You see the list of main categories without

the input characters. Here you can confirm

the current entry or make another selec-

tion.

You can also manually switch to the main

category list without input characters at

any time.

왘Switching manually to the main cat-

egory list without input characters:

Slide qm.

왘Select ? in the second line from the

bottom and press n.

iIn the list of input characters 5, you can

only select currently selectable characters.

Which characters are included depends on the

sequence in which you have entered your desti-

nation and the data version of the digital map.

컄컄

200

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)

Main category list without input

characters

Example illustration: main category list for

POIs in the surrounding area

1Category

2Symbol for available POIs or other

available subcategories

왘Selecting a main category: Slide

qmr or rotate ymz.

왘Canceling selection: Select “Back”

and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

Main categories with symbol 2 con-

tain either POIs or subcategories. Fur-

ther operation depends on whether the

selected main category contains sub-

categories or only POIs.

Selected main category contains subcate-

gories:

Selecting such a main category opens a list

of subcategories. The illustration below

shows by way of example the “RESTAU-

RANT” main category with available sub-

categories 4.

1Main category

2To show all POIs for all subcategories

under category 1

3Symbol for available POIs

4Subcategory

왘Selecting a subcategory: Slide qmr

or rotate ymz.

왘Canceling selection: Select “Back”

and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

컄컄

201

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

After selecting a subcategory, a list of

POIs appears. It contains the POIs

available within the search radius of

the subcategory.

Selected main category contains no sub-

categories, but only POIs:

Selecting such a main category immedi-

ately opens a list of POIs. The POI list con-

tains the available POIs within the search

radius of the main category.

POI list

Depending on the situation, COMAND first

shows the following list or the POI list with

input characters.

The illustration below shows by way of ex-

ample the POI list for the “RESTAURANT”

main category, “FRENCH CUISINE” subcat-

egory within the surrounding area.

1Compass heading to the destination

2Linear distance to the destination

3Special destination

In the POI list, you can either select a POI

or enter the name of the POI.

Selecting a POI

왘Select desired POI.

The POI list disappears and the address

of the POI appears.

왘Back to POI list: Select “Back” and

press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

왘Starting route calculation:

Select “Start”, see also (컄page 191).

iIf you have selected list item 2, the POI list

contains all POIs for all subcategories within the

search radius of main category 1.

iDisplays 1 and 2 are not visible if you

have already entered a POI within a particular

town or city. Displays 1 and 2 are static; they

do not change while you are driving.

컄컄

202

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)

Entering name of POI

왘Select “Options”  “Spell”.

The POI list appears with input charac-

ters; the input characters are automat-

ically activated.

POI list with input characters

1Top list entry based on the input data

up to that point

2Characters entered by the user

3Characters automatically added by the

system

4Input characters

5Currently selectable character

6Currently non-selectable characters

7POI list

8Currently selected character

While the characters are being selected as

described below, the top list entry 1 al-

ways shows the POI that best corresponds

to the input data as it has been entered up

to that point.

At the same time, COMAND automatically

supplements characters 2 entered by the

user with appropriate characters 3.

왘Selecting characters: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming character selection:

Press n.

왘Deleting individual characters:

Select ) in the bottom line and

press n.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in

the bottom line and press n until the

entire entry is deleted.

왘Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in

the bottom line and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

iFor POIs in other regions, this list also shows

the compass heading to the destination as well

as the linear distance to the destination, as in the

previous illustration.

iIn the list of input characters 4, you can

only select currently selectable characters.

Which characters are included depends on the

sequence in which you have entered your desti-

nation and the data version of the digital map.

컄컄

203

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)

As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute

the characters entered to a POI, the input

characters 4 disappear.

You see the POI list without input charac-

ters. Here you can confirm the current en-

try or make another selection.

You can also manually switch to the POI

list without input characters at any time.

왘Switching manually to the POI list

without input characters: Slide qm.

왘Select ? in the second line from the

bottom and press n.

POI list without input characters

왘Selecting a destination: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Canceling selection: Select “Back”

and press n.

왘Press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Starting route calculation:

Select “Start”, see also (컄page 191).

List options

Options in category and POI lists

If you enter a POI in the surrounding area,

initially, only categories and POIs within a

radius of approximately 12 mi around the

vehicle position are available.

The same applies if you enter a POI within

a given town or city and have previously

entered more than the state (USA) or prov-

ince (CDN) and the city or town.

If you expand the list, the search radius in-

creases to around 90 mi. This gives you ac-

cess to all categories and POIs within a

radius of about 90 mi.

왘Expanding list: In one of the lists se-

lect “Options”  “Expand Search”.

The list is expanded.

204

Control systems

Options only in POI lists

왘Displaying details of the selected

entry: Select “Options”  “Details”.

The detailed view appears.

왘Closing detailed view: Select “OK”.

Entering a POI from the map

왘Select “Guide” in the map view with the

menu system displayed (컄page 167).

You will see POI symbols on the map,

depending on whether POIs are avail-

able and which map scale is set.

The scale at which the symbols are dis-

played on the map varies according to

the symbol.

You can set which symbols COMAND

should display (컄page 170).

The POI closest to the center of the

screen is automatically marked.

If there are no POIs available, the

“Back” menu item is automatically

highlighted and you cannot select oth-

er menu items.

1Highlighted POI

2Information about the highlighted POI

왘Selecting a POI: Select “Next” or “Pre-

vious”.

The next or the previous POI is marked.

왘Displaying details of the selection:

Select “Details”.

왘Starting route calculation:

Select “Start”, see also (컄page 191).

A prompt appears asking whether the

POI should be used as the destination.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes”, the route calcula-

tion begins. If you select “No”, you can

select a new POI.

iIf the crosshair is shown on the map, you

can enter POIs in the vicinity of the crosshair.

If the crosshair is not shown on the map, you can

enter POIs in the vicinity of the vehicle’s current

position.

205

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (real-time traffic) (USA only)

COMAND navigation system (re-

al-time traffic) (USA only)

Depending on your vehicle’s production

date the real-time traffic function may not

be available.

A RDS-TMC (Radio Data System-Traffic

Message Channel) radio transmitter

broadcasts traffic reports COMAND can

receive and incorporate into the navigation

system. Traffic report messages and map

symbols can then be viewed in the

COMAND display. Events displayed are

those within receivable range of the vehi-

cle's location.

Real-time traffic notifications in the

map

COMAND can display certain traffic events

in the map. The notifications are shown at

the map scales from 0.05 mi (50 m) to

500 mi (500 km).

왘Set the map scale: Turn ymz until the

desired map scale is set.

Turning clockwise enlarges the map,

turning counterclockwise reduces it.

Display example for a traffic jam on the

route

1Symbol for event on the route

2Marker symbols for the affected route

section

3Current vehicle position and direction

of travel

4Map scale

iActual road and traffic conditions may be

different from the received messages.

iCOMAND marks the entire route section af-

fected with the appropriate symbols 2, inde-

pendently of its actual length on the route

section. The symbols 2 are shown in the direc-

tion of travel on the left or right of the route.Thus,

they also indicate which side of the roadway is

affected by the event.

206

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (real-time traffic) (USA only)

The following shows the possible symbol

displays.

1Traffic jam on the route (symbol with

red border)

2Traffic jam away from the route (sym-

bol with gray border)

3Stop and go traffic on the route (sym-

bol with red border)

4Stop and go traffic away from the route

(symbol with gray border)

5Blocked section on the route

6Traffic jam

7Stop and go traffic

Displaying real-time traffic reports

Displaying the message list

왘Select “Navi”  “Traffic”.

COMAND searches for real-time traffic

transmitters. When no traffic reports

are present, you will see a display to

this effect.

List for inactive route guidance

When route guidance is inactive, the list

displays all streets for which messages are

present.

1Affected street list

왘Read a message: Select a street.

You can find an example message on

(컄page 207).

왘Close the list: Slide omp.

iInstead of a street, an area or a region can

also be affected by a message, for example,

when visibility is limited due to fog.

207

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (real-time traffic) (USA only)

왔List for active route guidance

When route guidance is active, the list dis-

plays only the streets which are part of the

route and for which messages are present.

1Show all messages (including those

which do not affect the route)

2Affected streets (only shown when

messages which affect the route are

present)

왘Display all messages: Select “Display

All Messages”.

All streets are shown for which mes-

sages are present, as well as for those

which are not on the route.

왘Read a message: Select a street.

You can find an example message on

(컄page 207).

왘Close the list: Slide omp once or re-

peatedly.

Example message

1Selection display (“Messages On

Route” or “All messages”)

2Symbol for message event (e.g. traffic

jam)

3Street affected by the message

4Message 1 of 5 for the affected street

5Message text

The symbols for the possible message

events are shown in the following.

1Traffic jam symbol

2Stop and go traffic symbol

3Warning message symbol

4Blocked section symbol

왘Scroll through the contents or to the

next message: Turn ymz or slide

qmr.

208

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (route guidance)

COMAND navigation system

(route guidance)

Route guidance

COMAND guides you to the destination us-

ing navigation commands in the form of

audible navigation announcements and

route guidance displays.

If, for any reason, you do not follow the

navigation commands or if you leave the

calculated route, COMAND automatically

calculates a new route to the destination.

If the map data contains the relevant infor-

mation, COMAND tries to avoid roads that

only have limited access, e.g. roads closed

to through-traffic and non-residents.

Warning! G

COMAND calculates the route to the desti-

nation without taking account of the follow-

ing, for example:

앫Traffic lights

앫Stop and right-of-way signs

앫Parking or stopping prohibited areas

앫Lane merges

앫Other road and traffic rules and regula-

tions

앫Narrow bridges

COMAND may give incorrect navigation

commands if the data in the digital map

does not correspond with the actual

road/traffic situation. For example, if the

traffic routing has been changed or the di-

rection of a one-way road has been re-

versed.

For this reason, you must always observe

applicable road and traffic rules and regula-

tions during your journey. Road and traffic

rules and regulations always have priority

over the navigation commands generated by

the system.

iThe route guidance displays can only be

seen if the display is switched to navigation

mode.

209

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (route guidance)

Roads that have time restrictions (e.g.

closed on Sundays and public holidays) are

not considered for route guidance, if the

digital map contains the relevant informa-

tion.

Examples of displays and announce-

ments for a driving maneuver

Driving maneuvers have three phases:

앫Preparation phase

앫Announcement phase

앫Maneuver phase

Preparation phase

COMAND prepares you for the upcoming

driving maneuver. Based on the example

display below, the driving maneuver is an-

nounced with the “Prepare to turn left”

message. The display is not split and

shows the map over the full screen.

1Point at which the driving maneuver

takes place (light blue dot)

2Route (highlighted blue)

3Current vehicle position; the triangle

points in the vehicle’s direction of trav-

Announcement phase

COMAND announces the next driving ma-

neuver. Based on the example display be-

low, the driving maneuver is announced

700 feet in advance with the “Turn left in

700 feet to your destination” message.

The display is divided in two. In the left

half, you see the normal map view. In the

right half, there is either an enlarged view

of the area surrounding the intersection

(intersection zoom) or simply a symbol for

the next driving maneuver.

The following example illustration shows

the intersection zoom in the right half.

210

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (route guidance)

1Next road

2Driving maneuver (turn left)

3Graphical representation of the dis-

tance to the driving maneuver

4Point at which the driving maneuver

takes place (light blue dot, shown in

both the left and right displays)

5Information about distance to the next

driving maneuver

6Route (highlighted in blue; shown in

both the left and right displays)

7Current vehicle position; the triangle in-

dicates the vehicle’s direction of travel

(shown in both the left and right dis-

plays)

8Street on which you are currently driv-

ing, if included on the digital map

9Destination

Maneuver phase

COMAND announces the next driving ma-

neuver. Based on the example display be-

low, the driving maneuver is announced

150 feet in advance with the “Now turn

left” message. The display is also split into

two halves, as for the announcement

phase.

1Graphical representation of the dis-

tance to the next driving maneuver

2Information about distance to the next

driving maneuver

Example of a display without driving

maneuvers

1Main destination <

2Stopover = (only visible if a stopover

has been entered)

3Route (highlighted blue)

4Current vehicle position; the triangle in-

dicates the vehicle’s direction of travel

5Set map orientation – for an explana-

tion and settings, see (컄page 170)

6Set scale – for an explanation and set-

tings, see (컄page 168)

iThe filled-in section of distance graphic 3

gets shorter the nearer you get to the announced

driving maneuver.

iOnce the maneuver is completed, COMAND

automatically switches back to the non-split

screen.

211

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (route guidance)

Destination or destination area

reached

Once you have reached your destination,

you will hear the announcement “You have

reached the destination”. For certain POIs

(airports or highway junctions), you will

hear the announcement “You have reached

the destination area”. In addition, you will

see a corresponding display and route

guidance is automatically ended.

1Destination on the map

2Destination flag

Partially digitized areas If the destination is within a partially

digitized area

COMAND guides you through fully digitized

areas for as long as possible. Route guid-

ance is conducted in the usual manner, i.e.

with navigation announcements and route

guidance displays.

Before the vehicle reaches a partially digi-

tized area, COMAND notifies you of this

with the following announcements:

앫“Be prepared to enter an area where

turn by turn guidance cannot be provid-

ed.”

앫“In 700 feet you will enter an area

where turn by turn guidance cannot be

provided.”

앫“You are about to enter an area where

turn by turn guidance cannot be provid-

ed.”

iThe digital map may contain areas that are

only partially digitized although they are within a

digitized region.

Warning! G

Due to incomplete digitization, the route

shown on the map may differ from the actual

road/traffic situation.

If you follow the route shown on the map, for

example, it is possible that you could drive

the wrong way down a one-way street or

that a street cannot be driven on.

When using route guidance in a partially dig-

itized area, you must therefore be sure to

observe all relevant traffic regulations and

the course of the road.

All relevant traffic regulations and the

course of the road always take priority over

the route shown on the map.

iThe indicated distance can be seen here by

way of example. In reality, it may be different.

212

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (route guidance)

Route guidance within a partially digi-

tized area

If you start route guidance in this type of

area, you will hear the following announce-

ment: “You are currently in an area where

turn by turn guidance cannot be provided.”

Route guidance is provided by means of a

direction arrow showing the compass

heading to the destination. COMAND will

not generate automatic navigation an-

nouncements.

If you try to call up an announcement man-

ually, (컄page 214) you will hear the an-

nouncement “You are currently in an area

where turn by turn guidance cannot be pro-

vided.”.

During route guidance, the display is divid-

ed. On the right-hand side you will see the

direction arrow showing the compass

heading to the destination.

On the left-hand side of the display you will

see the map with the suggested route. The

suggested route is highlighted blue. How-

ever, it may not be possible to follow the

suggested route because, for example, the

road is closed or not open for car traffic.

If, during route guidance, COMAND leads

you back into a fully digitalized area, route

guidance will simply continue in the usual

manner.

Off-road and off-map

Route guidance to an off-road

destination

COMAND can guide you to destinations

within the area covered by the digital map,

even if a destination is not located at a

road known to the system.

iWhen you call up the route info to this type

of destination, (컄page 217) the following data

shown there may differ from the actual situation:

앫Distance to the destination

앫Estimated driving time to the destination

앫Estimated arrival time Warning! G

The COMAND navigation system may direct

you to off-road routes that your vehicle may

not be capable of traversing through without

damaging your tires, wheels or vehicle. It is

the driver’s sole responsibility to determine

the suitability of the route. Off-road routes

may be of varying conditions and their ap-

propriateness for use may be affected by

various factors such as time of day, time of

year and immediate weather conditions that

cannot be judged or taken into consider-

ation by the COMAND system.

213

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (route guidance)

These destinations are shown as off-road

destinations, which you can enter using

the map, for example.

In these cases, COMAND guides you for as

long as possible with navigation announce-

ments and displays on roads known to the

system.

Shortly before you reach the last known

the point to leave the digitized road net-

work, you will hear the announcement “The

destination is nearby. Follow the arrow on

the display”.

You will then see an arrow that indicates

the direction to the off-road destination.

When the off-road destination is close to

the road, “Area of dest. reached” appears

in addition below the arrow.

The section of the route from the last

known point on the map to the off-road

destination is indicated with a dashed line

after a certain length. It simply shows the

direction to the off-road destination with-

out taking account of any type of obstacles

in the way.

1Current vehicle position; the triangle in-

dicates the vehicle’s direction of travel

2Off-road section of the route

3Off-road destination

4Direction arrow, shows compass head-

ing to destination

On the off-road section of the route, direc-

tion arrows showing the compass heading

to the destination guide you. You will also

see the “Direction to destination” display.

Route guidance from an off-road

location to a destination

If there is no road available on map at cur-

rent position of the car, vehicle is off road.

COMAND is also able to guide you to a des-

tination from such a location.

At the start of the route guidance, you will

see the “Off Road” message and a direc-

tion arrow. The direction arrow shows the

compass heading to the actual destina-

tion.

The route is highlighted blue from the near-

est road known to the system.

As soon as the vehicle is back on a road

known to the system, route guidance con-

tinues in the usual way.

Route guidance from an off-map

location to a destination

If the vehicle position is outside the area

covered by the digital map, then the vehi-

cle is in an off-map location.

COMAND is also able to guide you to a des-

tination from such a location.

214

Control systems

At the start of the route guidance, you will see the “Off Map” message and a direction arrow. The direction arrow shows the compass

heading to the actual destination.

The route is highlighted blue from the near-

est road known to the system.

As soon as the vehicle is back on a road

known to the system, route guidance con-

tinues in the usual way.

Off-road during route guidance

The road layout may differ from the data on

the digital map, due to road construction

measures, for example.

In such cases, the system cannot allocate

the vehicle’s position to the digital map

and the vehicle is therefore in an off-road

position.

The “Off Road” message and an arrow

showing the compass heading to the desti-

nation appear on the display.

As soon as the system can allocate the ve-

hicle position’s to the map again, route

guidance continues in the usual way.

Navigation announcements

Route guidance is already active.

왘Calling up a current announcement:

Select “Navi”  6.

왘Press P favorite button if the button

has been programmed with this func-

tion (컄page 240).

왘Canceling navigation message:

Briefly press F shortcut button dur-

ing an announcement.

왘Switching off navigation messages:

Press and hold F during an an-

nouncement until the announcement is

switched off.

You will see the message “The driving

instructions have been muted.” for a

short while.

Warning! G

Navigation announcements are intended to

direct you while driving without diverting

your attention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of

consulting the map display for directions.

Consulting the symbols or map display for

directions may cause you to divert your at-

tention from driving and increase your risk

of an accident.

iIf Russian or Chinese is set as the system

language, the navigation announcements are in

English. You will find how to set the system lan-

guage on (컄page 240).

Navigation announcements are muted during

telephone calls. You can, however, call up a cur-

rent announcement at any time. You can also

call up a current announcement at any time if

you have missed an announcement.

iYou will find the button programming on

(컄page 240).

215

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (route guidance)

왘Switching navigation announce-

ments back on manually:

Select “Navi”  6.

왘Adjusting volume of the messages:

Adjust the volume during an automatic

announcement (컄page 96).

왘Call up an announcement manually us-

ing “Navi”  6 and adjust the vol-

ume (컄page 96).

iThe announcements remain switched off

even if you start a new route guidance or if

COMAND is switched off/on with the o but-

ton.

If you switch COMAND off by removing the

SmartKey from the starter switch and then

switch the ignition back on after more than

3 minutes, the announcements are automatical-

ly switched back on.

216

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (during route guidance)

COMAND navigation system

(during route guidance)

Cancel route guidance

왘Select “Destination”  “Cancel Route

Guidance” in map view with the menu

system displayed (컄page 167).

Continuing cancelled route guidance

왘Select “Destination”  “Continue

Route Guidance” in map view with the

menu system displayed (컄page 167).

COMAND calculates the route.

Route browser

왘Select “Route”  “Route Browser” in

map view with the menu system dis-

played (컄page 167).

The route browser appears.

1Highlighted route section

2Current vehicle position; the triangle in-

dicates the vehicle’s direction of travel

3Information about the highlighted route

section

왘Displaying next or previous route

section: Select “Next” or “Previous”.

왘Increasing or reducing size of the

map: Select ; or :.

왘Closing route browser:

Select “Back”.

iThe route browser shows an overview of the

route. You can use the route browser to move

along the route section by section and view infor-

mation about and details of each section of the

route.

iThe information 3 about the marked route

section shows the street name and the length of

the route section. Marked route section 1 is al-

ways highlighted in white and outlined in red.

217

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (during route guidance)

왔Displaying route information

왘Select “Route”  “Route Info” in map

view with the menu system displayed

(컄page 167).

The route information appears.

Example display with main destination and

stopover

1Distance to the destination

2Symbol = for stopover

3Abbreviation for province (CDN) or

state (USA)

4Town/city

5Street

6Symbol < for main destination

7Estimated driving time to the destina-

tion

8Estimated arrival time

왘Closing route info: Slide omp or

press back button L in the center

console (컄page 86).

iCOMAND uses the time set in COMAND as

the basis for calculating the estimated arrival

time. The clock must be set correctly in

COMAND (컄page 237). The calculation of the

estimated arrival time does not additionally take

into account whether Daylight Saving Time or

standard time is applicable at the destination. If

the destination is in a different time zone, arrival

time display 8 is in local time. This is indicated

by “LT” in the display.

The following data cannot be seen until the route

calculation has been completed:

앫Distance to destination 1

앫Estimated arrival time 8

앫Estimated remaining travel time 7

If the destination is located within a partially dig-

itized area, the following data may differ from the

facts:

앫Distance to destination 1

앫Estimated arrival time 8

앫Estimated remaining travel time 7

컄컄

218

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (during route guidance)

Detour function

왘Select “Route”  “Detour” in map view

with the menu system displayed

(컄page 167).

The detour function display appears.

왘Setting length of the blockage:

Select “More” or “Less” until the de-

sired length is set.

1Blocked route section

2Current vehicle position; the triangle in-

dicates the vehicle’s direction of travel

3Information about the blocked route

section

왘Starting route calculation:

Select “Start”, see also (컄page 191).

왘Deleting blockage: Select “Navi” 

“Route”  “Detour”  “Delete”.

왘Select “Back”.

iThe detour function blocks a section of the

route ahead of you. You can set the length of the

blockage. If possible, COMAND calculates a de-

tour route.

iThe detour function may direct you to

off-road routes. See Off-road and Off-map for ad-

ditional routes and cautions (컄page 212).

iBlocked route section 1 is always highlight-

ed in red/white. The information about blocked

route section 3 shows which section of the

route is blocked and the length of the blocked

section.

컄컄

219

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (destination memory)

COMAND navigation system

(destination memory)

Saving a destination in the destination

memory

Saving after the address has been en-

tered

왘Select “Save” after entering the ad-

dress (컄page 173).

You can now select save options.

Saving during route guidance

왘Select “Destination”  “Save Destina-

tion” during route guidance.

You can now select save options.

Saving a destination from the list of last

destinations

왘Select “Navi”  “Destination” 

“From Last Destinations”.

The list of last destinations appears.

왘Select desired destination.

The address of the destination is dis-

played.

왘Select “Save”.

You can now select save options.

Selecting save options

Saving a destination without a name

왘Select “Save Without Name”.

COMAND saves the destination in the

destination memory and uses the ad-

dress as the destination name.

왘Select “Save as ‘My Address’ ”.

왘Select desired category, e.g. “Home”.

COMAND saves the destination in the

destination memory as your own ad-

dress.

Saving a destination with a name

왘Select “Save new entry”.

왘Select desired category, e.g. “Home”.

The input menu appears with the data

fields and the input characters.

1Selected data field with input mark

(cursor)

2Input characters

iThis function also saves the destination in

the address book. There COMAND creates an

address book entry containing complete, naviga-

ble address data. You can then select this entry

in the address book and start navigation to the

address.

컄컄

220

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (destination memory)

왘Entering data: Proceed as described

in the “Changing the data field” operat-

ing step in the “Creating a new address

book entry” section (컄page 227).

Assigning a destination to an address

book entry

왘Select “Assign Address Book Entry”.

왘Select desired category, e.g. “Home”.

The menu appears for searching for an

address book entry.

왘Select desired address book entry. Pro-

ceed as described in the “Searching for

an address book entry” section

(컄page 228).

If the selected address book entry does

not yet contain any navigable address

data, COMAND saves the data.

If the selected address book entry al-

ready contains navigable address data,

you will see a question asking you if the

previous data should be overwritten.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes”, COMAND saves the

data.

Deleting a destination from the destina-

tion memory

왘Select “Navi”  “Destination” 

“From Memory”.

Depending on the number of entries in

the destination memory, you will see

the destination memory list with or

without input characters.

Example illustration: destination memory

list without input characters

iThis function assigns the complete, naviga-

ble address data to an already existing address

book entry. You can then select this entry in the

address book and start navigation to the address

from there.

컄컄

221

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (destination memory)

Example illustration: destination memory

list with input characters

1Input characters

왘Select desired destination. Proceed as

described for destination entry in the

“Entering a destination from the desti-

nation memory” section (컄page 192).

왘Select “Delete” after selecting the des-

tination to be deleted.

A prompt appears asking whether you

want to delete the destination.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes”, COMAND deletes

the destination.

Own address

Assigning your address for the first

time or changing your own address

Assigning and/or changing your own ad-

dress

왘Select “Navi”  “Destination” 

“From Memory”.

Depending on the number of entries in

the destination memory, you will see

the destination memory list with or

without input characters.

Example illustration: destination memory

list without input characters

In the destination memory list without in-

put characters, the “My Address” entry is

automatically highlighted.

iIf the navigable address data of the destina-

tion to be deleted has also been assigned to an

address book entry, COMAND deletes the data

there as well. If the corresponding address book

entry does not contain any further data, such as

telephone numbers, COMAND deletes the entire

address book entry.

iThe destination memory always contains an

entry called “My Address”. You can save your

home address, for example, under this entry.

222

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (destination memory)

Example illustration: destination memory

list with input characters

1Input characters

In the destination memory list with input

characters 1, the input characters are au-

tomatically activated.

왘Destination memory list without in-

put characters: Press n immediately.

왘Destination memory list with input

characters: Slide qm repeatedly until

the input characters disappear.

The list entry “My Address” is automat-

ically highlighted as long as you have

not entered any characters using the

input characters.

왘If you have entered characters

from the list of input characters:

Rotate ymz or slide qm repeatedly

until the list entry “My Address” is

highlighted.

왘Press n.

Further operation depends on whether you

want to enter the address manually or use

an address book entry as your own ad-

dress.

Entering an address manually

왘If you want to assign your own ad-

dress for the first time: Select “Save

new entry”.

왘If you want to change your own ad-

dress: Select “Change”  “Save new

entry”.

In both cases, the address input menu ap-

pears.

왘Enter the address. Proceed as de-

scribed for destination entry in the “En-

tering a destination by address”

section (컄page 173).

왘Select “Save” after entering the ad-

dress.

Your address is saved.

223

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (destination memory)

왔Using the address book entry as your own address

왘If you want to assign your own ad-

dress for the first time:

Select “Assign Address Book Entry”.

왘If you want to change your own ad-

dress: Select “Change”  “Assign Ad-

dress Book Entry”.

In both cases, the menu appears for

searching for an address book entry.

왘Select desired address book entry. Pro-

ceed as described in the “Searching for

an address book entry” section

(컄page 228).

Once the address data is complete and if it

matches the digital map data, COMAND

saves the entry as your own address in the

destination memory.

If address data is still missing or if it cannot

be found on the digital map, a message ap-

pears indicating that the address is incom-

plete.

왘Closing message: Select “OK”.

Depending on which data is missing or

cannot be found on the digital map, you

must now either:

앫select a state (USA) or province (CDN)

앫or enter a town/city

앫or enter a street

앫or enter a house number

왘Selecting a state (USA) or province

(CDN): Select desired state (USA) or

province (CDN) from the list.

왘Entering a town: Proceed as de-

scribed for destination entry in the “En-

tering a town or city” section

(컄page 179).

왘Entering a street: Proceed as de-

scribed for destination entry in the “En-

tering a street” section (컄page 181).

왘Entering a house number: Proceed

as described for destination entry in

the “Entering a house number” section

(컄page 186).

If all data is available and matches the

digital map data, you can save the ad-

dress.

왘Saving: Select “Save”.

iIn the address book entry, the town/city

and street must be spelled in the same way as

the destination entry so that the data matches

the digital map data.

In order for the state (USA) or province (CDN) to

match the map data, you may either enter the

entire name or the abbreviation in the address

book.

Examples:

앫Florida or FL

앫Colorado or CO

앫Alberta or AB

앫Ontario or ON

224

Control systems

Displaying your own address

왘Select “Navi”  “Destination” 

“From Memory”.

The destination memory list appears ei-

ther with or without the input charac-

ters. Whether the input characters

appear depends on the number of en-

tries in the destination memory.

왘Press n.

Destination memory list without input

characters

In the destination memory list without in-

put characters, the “My Address” entry is

automatically highlighted.

왘Press n.

If your own address has already been

assigned, you will see the menu for

starting route guidance with your own

address data.

왘Exiting menu: Select “Back”.

Destination memory list with input

characters

1Input characters

In the destination memory list with input

characters 1, the input characters are au-

tomatically activated.

왘Slide qm repeatedly until the input

characters disappear.

The list entry “My Address” is automat-

ically highlighted as long as you have

not entered any characters using the

input characters.

왘If you have entered characters

from the list of input characters:

Rotate ymz or slide qm repeatedly

until the list entry “My Address” is

highlighted.

왘Press n.

If your own address has already been

assigned, you will see the menu for

starting route guidance with your own

address data.

왘Exiting menu: Select “Back”.

225

Control systems

COMAND navigation system (last destinations)

COMAND navigation system

(last destinations)

Saving a destination permanently in

the destination memory

왘Proceed as described in the “Saving a

destination from the list of last destina-

tions” section (컄page 219).

Saving the vehicle position in the list of

last destinations

왘Centering map on the vehicle’s posi-

tion: Select “Navi”  “Position” 

“Vehicle Position Map”.

왘Saving: Select “Navi”  “Position” 

“Save Position”.

COMAND saves the current vehicle po-

sition as a destination in the list of last

destinations.

Saving the crosshair position in the list

of last destinations

왘Showing menu system, if neces-

sary: Press n.

왘Select “Position”  “Save Position”.

COMAND saves the crosshair position

as a destination in the list of last desti-

nations.

Deleting one of the last destinations

왘Select “Navi”  “Destination” 

“From Last Destinations”.

The list of last destinations appears.

왘Select desired destination.

The address of the destination ap-

pears.

왘Select “Delete”.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

iCOMAND automatically saves the last desti-

nations for which the route calculation was

launched. It is stored in the “last destinations”

memory. If this memory is full, COMAND deletes

the oldest destination. You can also save one

destination from the list of last destinations in

the destination memory. It will be saved there

permanently.

iIf you have manually moved the map, you

will see a crosshair on the map (컄page 168).

You can save the crosshair position as a destina-

tion in the list of last destinations.

컄컄

226

Control systems

COMAND address book

General notes

The address book contains the entries that

are saved in the COMAND address book

memory. The entries are permanently

available even if the phone is not inserted

in the cradle*. When you insert the mobile

phone into the cradle*, COMAND reads-in

the phone book entries saved in the mobile

phone and stores the entries as a separate

list from the COMAND address book. This

list is a copy of the phone’s phone book.

This can take several minutes, depending

on how many entries the phone book and

the address book contain. After the read-in

process, the COMAND compares the

phone book entries with the address book

entries. If all of the telephone numbers of a

phone book entry in the mobile phone are

present in an address book entry, the ad-

dress book shows only the address book

entry. If not, the address book also shows

the phone book entry in the mobile phone.

Address book menu overview

Calling up the address book

왘Select “Telephone”  “Telephone” 

“Address Book”.

The main address book display ap-

pears. If the address book already con-

tains entries, you will see the data of an

entry.

Illustration: address book entry

Warning! G

Please devote your attention first and fore-

most to the traffic situation you are in.

Before your journey, please familiarize your-

self with the address book functions.

Only use the COMAND when road and traffic

conditions permit you to do so. Otherwise

you could be involved in an accident in

which you or others could be injured.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

Search New Entry

Search for an ad-

dress book entry

Create new address

book entry

iFor phone book entries in the mobile phone

that contain a name and a telephone number,

you will see the name and the number. If a phone

book entry in the mobile phone contains several

telephone numbers, you will see the message

“Multiple Numbers” instead of a telephone num-

ber.

컄컄

227

Control systems

COMAND address book

Selecting an entry in the main address

book display

왘Slide omp or rotate ymz until the

main area is selected.

Creating a new address book entry

왘Select “Telephone”  “Telephone” 

“Address Book”  “New Entry”.

The input menu appears with the data

fields and the input characters.

Illustration: input menu for private data

1To switch between work and home

data ( or symbol)

2Selected data field with input mark

(cursor)

3Display of set data type – in example

display, home data is set ( symbol

and “Home” display)

4Input characters

왘Switching between private and

business data: Select symbol 1.

The display switches to private or busi-

ness data, depending on the previous

status.

왘Changing data field: Slide rmq re-

peatedly until desired entry is highlight-

ed.

왘Select [ or ] repeatedly until de-

sired entry is highlighted.

왘Entering data into a field:

Select desired characters one by one

from the input characters.

왘Toggling upper and lower case for

the input characters: Select & or

왘Changing language for the input

characters: Select !.

왘Select desired language.

iPlease observe the following when creating

a new address book entry:

You can define your own address in the destina-

tion memory in navigation mode. When defining

the address, you can transfer data already en-

tered as an address book entry.

In the address book entry, the town/city and

street must be spelled in the same way as the

destination entry so that the data matches the

digital map data.

In order for the state (province) to match the

map data, its complete name or abbreviation

may be entered.

Examples:

앫Florida or FL

앫Colorado or CO

앫Alberta or AB

앫Ontario or ON

컄컄

228

Control systems

COMAND address book

왘Changing character set for the input

characters: Select #.

Depending on the previous setting, you

will change to letters with special char-

acters or to numbers with special char-

acters.

왘Moving cursor in the data field:

Select Y or Z.

왘Deleting individual characters:

Select ) and briefly press n.

The character to the left of the cursor is

deleted.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select )

and press and hold n until the entry is

deleted.

왘Saving an entry: Select ?.

왘Canceling an entry: Select “Back”.

If one of the data fields contains new

data, a prompt will appear asking

whether you want to save the entry.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

The entry will either be saved or

not, depending on your selection.

Deleting an entry

왘Search for desired entry (컄page 228).

왘Select “Options”  “Delete”.

A deletion prompt appears.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

The entry will either be deleted or not,

depending on your selection.

Searching for an address book entry

왘Select “Telephone”  “Telephone” 

“Address Book”  “Search”.

The search menu appears with the

smart speller.

1Symbol for complete address data

from the navigation system

2Symbol for summarized entries

from the mobile phone with the same

name but different telephone numbers

3Category symbol

4Smart speller

5Symbol for voice entry

6Back to the main address book display

iYou cannot delete phone book entries from

the mobile phone.

컄컄

229

Control systems

COMAND address book

Entries with category symbol 3 come

from the mobile phone. The following cate-

gory symbols are possible:

앫 = symbol for “Mobile” category

앫 = symbol for “Home” category

앫 = symbol for “Work” category

앫 = symbol for “Fax” category

앫 = symbol for “Pager” category

앫 = symbol for “Main” category or for

unknown category or for phone entries

that are saved on the SIM card of a

GSM mobile phone

Entries without a category symbol or with

the or symbols come from the

COMAND address book. All other entries

come from the mobile phone and are only

visible when the mobile phone is in the cra-

dle*.

Entries with the symbol contain a voice

entry (컄page 234). It is possible to add

voice entries in vehicles with Voice Con-

trol*.

Entries with the symbol contain com-

plete, navigable address data from the nav-

igation system that correspond to digital

map data. It is possible to quickly start

route guidance to these types of entry

(컄page 233).

Switching from the smart speller to the

list

왘Slide mq repeatedly or press n until

the smart speller is hidden.

왘Select ?.

Switching from the list to the smart

speller

왘Select “Back” from the list.

Searching

Searching via the smart speller

왘Switch from the list to the smart speller

if necessary.

왘Changing smart speller language:

Select !.

왘Select desired language.

왘Changing smart speller character

set: Select #.

Depending on the previous setting, you

will change to letters with special char-

acters or to numbers with special char-

acters.

왘Entering characters: Select the char-

acters one by one of the entry you are

searching for.

왘Deleting individual characters:

Select ) and briefly press n.

Each time you enter or delete a charac-

ter, the closest match will be displayed

at the top of the list.

왘Deleting an entire entry: Select )

and press and hold n until the entry is

deleted.

컄컄

230

Control systems

COMAND address book

왘Canceling search: Switch from the

smart speller to the list (컄page 229).

The entry at the top of the list is auto-

matically highlighted.

왘Going back to main address book

display: If necessary, switch from the

list to the smart speller (컄page 229)

and select “Back” in the smart speller.

Searching via the list

왘If necessary, switch from the smart

speller to the list (컄page 229).

왘Rotate ymz or slide qmr until desired

entry is highlighted on the list.

Displaying a complete address book

entry

Searching for the desired entry

왘Search for an address book entry

(컄page 228).

왘Select an address book entry in the

main address book menu

(컄page 227).

왘Press n.

The detailed view appears.

Illustration: detailed view for private data

1To go back to the previous menu

2To switch between work and home

data ( symbol or )

3Selected data field

4Display of set data type – in example

display, home data is set ( symbol

and “Home” display)

5To call up options

Switching between private or business

data

왘Select symbol 2.

The display switches to private or busi-

ness data, depending on the previous

status.

iThe options available under “Options” menu

item 4 depend on which data field 3 is select-

ed. The following options may be available:

앫Displaying abbreviated content in full

(컄page 231)

앫Changing an address book entry

((컄page 231)

앫Changing the description of a telephone

number data field (컄page 232)

앫Adding a telephone number data field

(컄page 232)

앫Calling a number saved in an entry

(컄page 233)

앫Starting route guidance to an entry

(컄page 233)

앫Options for voice entries (컄page 234)

컄컄

231

Control systems

COMAND address book

Selecting a different data field

왘Rotate ymz or slide qmr.

Displaying abbreviated content in full

왘Select “Options”  “Details”.

The display is shown in full.

왘Closing entire display: Slide qmr or

omp or press n.

Closing the detailed view

왘Select “Back”.

Displaying of a complete phone book

entry in the mobile phone

Searching for the desired entry

왘Search for phone book entry in mobile

phone (컄page 228).

왘Select a phone book entry from the

mobile phone using the COMAND

address book menu (컄page 227).

왘Press n.

The detailed view appears.

1To go back to the previous menu

2Category symbol

3Display for phone book entry in mobile

phone

4To call up options

Closing the detailed view

왘Select “Back”.

Changing an entry

Changing an address book entry

왘Search for an address book entry

(컄page 228) then, select “Options” 

“Change”.

iThe mobile phone must be inserted in the

cradle*.

iIf a phone book entry in the mobile phone

has more than one telephone number, you will

see all telephone numbers with the respective

category symbol 2 in the detailed view.

iThe options available under “Options” menu

item 4 depend on which data field 3 is select-

ed. The following options may be available:

앫Changing a phone book entry in the mobile

phone (컄page 231)

앫Calling a number saved in an entry

((컄page 233)

앫Saving a phone book entry from mobile

phone in the address book (컄page 235)

iYou cannot change address book entries

that come from the phone book in the mobile

phone.

232

Control systems

COMAND address book

왘Display the details of an address book

entry (컄page 230) then, select “Op-

tions”  “Change Content”.

The input menu appears with the data

fields.

왘Proceed as described in the “Switching

between private and business data”

paragraph in the “Creating a new ad-

dress book entry” section

(컄page 227).

Changing the description of a tele-

phone number data field

왘Display the details of an entry and high-

light the telephone number data field

(컄page 230).

왘Select “Options”  “Change Entry

Name”.

왘Select a number category, e.g. “Home”.

왘Select a telephone category, e.g. “Land

Line”.

왘Select “Save”.

COMAND saves the data if there are

fewer than four numbers assigned to

the entry you are searching for in the

selected number category.

Otherwise, you will see a prompt ask-

ing whether one of the existing num-

bers should be overwritten.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes”, a selection list will

appear containing the four existing

numbers.

왘Select number to be overwritten.

COMAND overwrites the selected num-

ber with the new data.

Adding to a telephone number data

field

왘Display the details of an entry and high-

light the telephone number data field

(컄page 230).

왘Select “Options”  “Add Number”.

왘Select a number category, e.g. “Home”.

왘Select a telephone category, e.g. “Land

Line”.

왘Select “Save”.

COMAND adds the data field to the entry if

there are fewer than four numbers as-

signed to the entry in the selected number

category. You can now enter a number into

the data field.

왘Proceed as described from the “Enter-

ing data into a field” operating step in

the “Creating a new address book en-

try” section (컄page 227).

If four numbers are already saved for the

entry in the selected number category, a

prompt will appear asking whether one of

the data fields should be overwritten.

iThis function is not possible for phone book

entries in the mobile phone.

iOne address book entry may contain up to

four data fields for private telephone numbers

and four data fields for business telephone num-

bers.

This function is not possible for phone book en-

tries in the mobile phone.

233

Control systems

COMAND address book

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes”, a selection list will

appear containing the four data fields.

왘Select field to be overwritten.

COMAND deletes the number of the se-

lected field. You can now enter a new

number into the data field.

왘Proceed as described from the “Enter-

ing data into a field” operating step in

the “Creating a new address book en-

try” section (컄page 227).

Calling a number saved in an entry

왘Display the details of an entry and high-

light the telephone number data field

(컄page 230).

왘Press n.

왘Select “Options”  “Call”.

In both cases, the telephone* connects

the call. The COMAND display is show-

ing the telephone mode screen.

Starting route guidance to an entry

왘Search for an address book entry

(컄page 228).

왘Display the details of an entry and high-

light the address data field

(컄page 230).

왘Select “Options”  “Navigate”.

왘Press n.

Further operation depends on whether the

address data is complete and matches the

digital map data of the navigation system.

It does not match, for example, if it is not

spelled in the same way as the destination

entry.

Address data is complete and matches

digital map

If “Navigate” is selected, the navigation

system starts the route calculation.

Address data is incomplete or does not

match digital map

If “Navigate” is selected, a message ap-

pears indicating that the address is incom-

plete.

iTo do this, COMAND must be equipped with

a telephone*. The mobile phone must be insert-

ed in the cradle*. iPressing n only functions if one of the ad-

dress data fields contains data.

iFor the route calculation, the navigation sys-

tem requires the correct spellings of the state

(province), the town/city or zip code, the street

and under some circumstances, the house num-

ber. The town/city and street must be spelled in

the same manner as the destination entry.

The state (province) can be spelled as an entire

name or as an abbreviation.

Examples:

앫Florida or FL

앫Colorado or CO

앫Alberta or AB

앫Ontario or ON

234

Control systems

COMAND address book

왘Closing message: Select “OK”.

Depending on which data is missing or

cannot be found on the digital map, you

must now either:

앫select a state (province)

앫select a county

앫or enter a town/city

앫or enter a street

앫or enter a house number

왘Selecting a state (province):

Select desired state (province) from

the list.

왘Selecting a county: Select desired

county from the list.

왘Entering a town: Proceed as de-

scribed for destination entry in the “En-

tering a town or city” section

(컄page 179).

왘Entering a street: Proceed as de-

scribed for destination entry in the “En-

tering a street” section (컄page 181).

왘Entering a house number: Proceed

as described for destination entry in

the “Entering a house number” section

(컄page 186).

If all data is available and matches the dig-

ital map data, the navigation system starts

the route calculation.

Voice entries

Adding or changing a voice entry

왘Search for the address book entry with

or without a voice entry (컄page 228).

왘Select “Options”  “Voice Name” 

“Add” or “Change”.

Subsequent operation is controlled by

voice. Voice Control* guides you

through the dialogs.

iIf you have added data, COMAND saves your

additions. This means that you do not need to

re-enter this additional data later on.

The COMAND memory saves the additional data

in a special field, which cannot be displayed. The

data, which you have entered in the address

book initially in the display, remains unchanged.

iFor voice entries, your vehicle must be

equipped with Voice Control*. You can not add

voice entries for address book entry that come

from the phone book in the mobile phone.

iYou can add one voice entry per address

book entry.

235

Control systems

COMAND address book

왔Deleting a voice entry

왘Search for the address book entry with

a voice entry (컄page 228).

왘Select “Options”  “Voice Name” 

“Delete”.

A deletion prompt appears.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

COMAND deletes the voice entry de-

pending on your selection.

Listening to a voice entry

왘Search for the address book entry with

a voice entry (컄page 228).

왘Select “Options”  “Voice Name” 

“Read Aloud”.

You will hear the voice entry.

Saving a phone book entry from mobile

phone in the COMAND address book

Saving a phone book entry from mobile

phone as new address book entry

왘Search for phone book entry in mobile

phone (컄page 228).

왘Display details of a phone book entry in

the mobile phone (컄page 230).

왘Select “Options”  “Save”  “New En-

try”.

왘Select a number category, e.g. “Work”.

왘Select a telephone category, e.g. “Mo-

bile”.

왘Select “Save”.

The input menu appears with the data

fields. The name and the telephone

number are entered automatically.

1Data field

2Input mark (cursor)

3Input characters

왘Proceed as described in the “Changing

a data field” paragraph in the “Creating

a new address book entry” section

(컄page 227).

iThe mobile phone must be inserted in the

cradle* and the COMAND have read out the mo-

bile phone book data. This can take several min-

utes, depending on how many entries each

phone book contains.

236

Control systems

COMAND address book

Saving a phone book entry from the

mobile phone in an existing address

book entry

왘Search for a phone book entry in the

mobile phone (컄page 228).

왘Display details of a phone book entry in

the mobile phone (컄page 230).

왘Select “Options”  “Save”  “Add”.

왘Select a number category, e.g. “Home”.

왘Select a telephone category, e.g. “Land

Line”.

왘Select “Save”.

The search menu for address book en-

tries appears.

왘Search for desired entry.

왘After selecting an entry, press n.

COMAND saves the data if there are

fewer than four numbers assigned to

the selected entry in the selected num-

ber category. Otherwise, you will see a

prompt asking whether one of the ex-

isting numbers should be overwritten.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes”, a selection list will

appear containing the four existing

numbers.

왘Select the number to be overwritten.

COMAND overwrites the selected num-

ber with the new data.

Importing data from external

Bluetooth® devices

You can import vCards from external

Bluetooth® devices into the address book.

Please keep the following in mind:

앫Bluetooth® is activated in COMAND

(컄page 241) and in the device con-

cerned.

앫The external device must be able to

send vCards by Bluetooth®.

앫The external device is inside the vehi-

cle, switched on and authorized

(컄page 241).

왘Importing: Start data transfer on the

external device (see operating instruc-

tions of the device concerned).

If there is no address book entry with

the same first name and last name,

COMAND imports the data.

If there is already an address book en-

try with the same first name and last

name, a prompt will appear asking

whether the existing data should be

overwritten.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

The existing address book entry will be

overwritten or not, depending on your

selection.

iThe mobile phone must be inserted in the

cradle*.

iThere is a detailed description of how to

search for an address book entry in the “Search-

ing for an address book entry” section

(컄page 228).

237

Control systems

COMAND system settings

System settings menu overview

Display settings

Switching the display on or off

왘Switching off: Select “Vehicle” 

“Display OFF”.

왘Switching back on: Rotate ymz or

slide qmr.

Setting the display design

왘Select “Vehicle”  “System Settings”

 “Display”.

왘Select “Day Mode”, “Night Mode” or

“Automatic”.

Time settings

Setting the time

왘Select “Vehicle”  “System Settings”

 “Time”  “Time”.

왘Selecting hour or minute(s):

Slide omp.

왘Setting value: Rotate ymz or

slide qmr.

왘Saving setting: Press n.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

Display

(컄page 237)

Time

(컄page 237)

Voice Control*

(컄page 239)

Language

(컄page 240)

Favorite

(컄page 240)

Services

(컄page 241)

Reset

(컄page 237)

Display settings Time settings Voice Control*

settings

Language

settings

Assign favorite

button

Bluetooth®

settings

Reset COMAND to

factory settings

iIn the “Automatic” setting, COMAND ana-

lyzes the automatic vehicle light sensor and

switches between the display design automati-

cally.

iThe correct time must be set for the follow-

ing navigation system functions to operate cor-

rectly:

앫Route guidance on routes with time-depen-

dent traffic guidance

앫Calculation of estimated arrival time

iThe increment value for setting the minutes

depends on the situation. If GPS reception is

available, it is 30 minutes. If GPS reception is not

available, it is one minute.

238

Control systems

COMAND system settings

Setting the time zone and switching be-

tween Daylight Saving Time and stan-

dard time

왘Setting time zone: Select “Vehicle” 

“System Settings”  “Time”  “Time

Zone”.

The country list appears. The dot R in

front of a list entry indicates the cur-

rent setting.

왘Select the country in which you are cur-

rently driving.

A time zone list may also be displayed,

depending on the country selected.

왘Select desired time zone.

Subsequent operation depends on:

앫whether your navigation system has

GPS reception

앫which country you have previously set

You may either:

앫manually switch between “Daylight

Savings Time (Summer)” and “Standard

time (Winter)” in a list

앫switch automatic Daylight Saving Time

to standard time changeover (and vice

versa) on or off

왘Switching manually: Select “Daylight

Savings Time (Summer)” or “Standard

time (Winter)”.

The dot R in front of a list entry indi-

cates the current setting.

왘Switching automatic changeover on

or off: Select “Automatic Daylight Sav-

ings Time”.

You have switched the function on or

off. A checkmark appears when the

function is switched on.

왘Saving setting and exit the menu:

Slide omp.

Setting the date

왘Select “Vehicle”  “System Settings”

 “Time”  “Date”.

왘Selecting month, day or year:

Slide omp.

왘Setting value: Rotate ymz or

slide qmr.

왘Saving setting: Press n.

iThe correct time zone and Daylight Saving

Time/standard time must be set for the follow-

ing navigation system functions to operate cor-

rectly:

앫Route guidance on routes with time-depen-

dent traffic guidance

앫Calculation of estimated arrival time iIf you have switched off the automatic

changeover function, you must change Daylight

Saving Time to standard time and vice versa

yourself.

239

Control systems

COMAND system settings

Setting the time/date format

왘Select “Vehicle”  “System Settings”

 “Time”  “Format”.

The format list appears. The dots R in

front of the list entries indicate the cur-

rent setting.

왘Changing format setting:

Select desired format.

왘Saving setting and exit the menu:

Slide omp.

Voice Control* settings

Switching help window on or off

왘Select “Vehicle” “System Settings”

 “Voice Control”.

왘Select “Help Window”.

You can switch the help window on or

off. A checkmark appears when the

help window is switched on.

Individualization

Using individualization, you can fine-tune

Voice Control* to your own voice and thus

improve voice recognition. The ability of

the system to recognize the commands of

other users does not deteriorate as a re-

sult.

Individualization consists of two parts. You

train the system to recognize digits in the

first part and specific commands in the

second part.

Starting new individualization

왘Select “Vehicle”  “System Settings”

 “Voice Control”  “Start new indi-

vidualization”.

A prompt appears asking whether you

would like further information.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “No”, the first part of indi-

vidualization begins.

If you select “Yes”, an information dis-

play will be shown with audio instruc-

tion.

왘Closing display: Select “OK”.

The first part of individualization be-

gins.

At the end of the first part, you will see

a prompt asking whether you want to

begin the second part.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “No”, individualization will

be canceled. The data from the first

part is saved automatically.

If you select “Yes”, the second part be-

gins.

Individualization is completed at the end of

the second part. You will see a message to

this effect. The data from the second part

is saved automatically.

iIt is only possible to start individualization

with the vehicle stationary. After starting the

session, the system will guide you through the in-

dividualization by means of acoustic instruc-

tions.

컄컄

240

Control systems

COMAND system settings

Canceling during the first or second part

of individualization

왘Select “Cancel”.

A prompt appears asking whether you

really do want to cancel.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes”, individualization will

be canceled. The data from the part at

which you exited is not saved.

If you select “No”, the part at which you

stopped begins again.

Deleting existing individualization data

왘Select “Vehicle”  “System Settings”

 “Voice Control”  “Delete individu-

alization”.

A prompt appears asking whether you

really do want to delete.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

The individualization data will either be

deleted or not, depending on your se-

lection.

Setting the system language

왘Select “Vehicle”  “System Settings”

 “Language”.

The language list appears. A dot R in-

dicates the current setting.

왘Changing setting: Select desired lan-

guage.

The language is set.

Assigning the favorite button

1Favorite button

You can assign the following predefined

functions to the favorite button P:

앫“Rear Window Sunshade” (컄page 503)

You can use the favorite button to ex-

tend or retract the rear window sun-

shade. This is the default setting.

앫“Display OFF” (컄page 237)

You can use the favorite button to

switch the COMAND display on or off.

앫“Repeat Navigation Command”

(컄page 214)

You can use the favorite button to re-

call the last announcement issued by

the navigation system.

왘Select “Vehicle”  “System Settings”

 “Favorite”.

The list of predefined functions appears.

The dot R in front of the list entry indi-

cates the current setting.

왘Changing setting: Rotate ymz and

select desired function.

왘Saving setting and exit the menu:

Press n.

컄컄

241

Control systems

COMAND system settings

Bluetooth® settings

General information about Bluetooth®

Bluetooth® technology is the standard for

short-range wireless technologies, suitable

for transmitting voice and data. It is possi-

ble to connect Bluetooth® devices wire-

lessly. Bluetooth® can be used to

exchange vCards or make calls using a

headset.

Bluetooth® technology uses the freely

available ISM (Industrial Scientific Medi-

cal) wireless network that works at

2.45 GHz. Ranges of up to ten meters are

possible with Bluetooth®.

Activate or deactivate Bluetooth®

왘Select “Vehicle”  “System Settings”

 “Services”  “Deactivate Blue-

tooth”.

You have activated or deactivated

Bluetooth®. A checkmark appears

when Bluetooth® is deactivated.

Connecting Bluetooth® devices

It is possible to establish a Bluetooth® con-

nection between COMAND and the follow-

ing types of device:

앫Mobile phone (only for transferring

business cards)

앫Headset

앫Laptop/PDA

You can connect up to twelve devices to

COMAND but only one device can be ac-

tive at a time.

The connection process includes search-

ing for the device and its subsequent au-

thorization.

Calling up the Bluetooth® device list

and searching for devices

왘Calling up the list: Select “Vehicle” 

“System Settings”  “Services” 

“Search for Bluetooth devices”.

When you call up the list for the first

time after switching on COMAND, the

search for devices in the reception

range starts automatically. You will see

a display to this effect.

The device list appears after a short

while.

왘Canceling search:

Select “Cancel”.

iTo connect a Bluetooth® device, the

Bluetooth® function must be activated in

COMAND and in the device concerned. The

Bluetooth® device must also be set to “visible”

or “findable” in order for COMAND to find and

display it. For the setting procedures, please see

the operating instructions for the Bluetooth®

device.

242

Control systems

The second time you call up the list, and each time thereafter, the device list appears immediately if COMAND has not been switched

off and on again in the meantime.

왘Starting search manually:

Select “Update”.

The device list can contain the following

devices:

앫All detected devices, whether autho-

rized or not.

앫All authorized devices, whether detect-

ed or not.

1Authorized and detected device – de-

vice and padlock symbol are the same

color

2Device which was not detected, but

which has been authorized in the past

– device and padlock symbol are differ-

ent colors (the device may be switched

off or not in the vehicle, for example)

3Newly detected device - not yet autho-

rized (no symbol)

Displaying details of a Bluetooth® de-

vice

왘Call up Bluetooth® device list

(컄page 241).

왘Select desired device.

왘Select “Details”.

The detailed display for this device ap-

pears.

왘Closing detailed display: Slide qmr

or press n.

Authorizing a Bluetooth® device

왘Call up Bluetooth® device list

(컄page 241).

왘Select unauthorized device.

왘Select “Authorize”.

The input menu for the passkey ap-

pears.

iIf the device list already contains twelve au-

thorized devices, you must revoke authorization

for one of the authorized devices. Then you must

switch this device off and then restart the

search. Any new devices for which you would like

to search will otherwise not appear in the list.

iThe passkey is any one to sixteen-digit num-

ber which you can set yourself. You must enter

the same number in COMAND and also in the de-

vice to be authorized.

243

Control systems

COMAND system settings

왘Entering passkey into COMAND:

Select the digits one by one.

왘Deleting digits: Select ) and briefly

press n.

왘Canceling entry into COMAND:

Select “Back”.

왘Confirming entry into COMAND:

Select ?.

왘If necessary, enter the same passkey

into the Bluetooth® device (see the op-

erating instructions for the device).

The device is authorized.

De-authorizing a Bluetooth® device

왘Call up Bluetooth® device list

(컄page 241).

왘Select authorized device.

왘Select “De-authorize”.

A prompt appears asking whether you

really want to de-authorize this device.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes”, the device will be

de-authorized.

Reset

왘Select “Vehicle”  “System Settings”

 “Reset”.

A prompt appears asking whether you

really want to reset.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes” another prompt will

appear asking whether you really want

to reset.

왘Select “Yes” or “No”.

If you select “Yes”, COMAND will be re-

set and restarted.

iOn devices which do not have an input key-

pad (e.g. headsets), the passkey is predeter-

mined. In this case, it is not necessary to enter

the number on the device itself. You will usually

find the passkey in the operating instructions for

the device.

iIf you de-authorize a device which has been

authorized in the past and which is not detected

in the search, this device will no longer be dis-

played in the device list.

Devices which have been authorized in the past

but which are not detected in the search are ei-

ther not switched on or not in the vehicle.

iYou can reset COMAND back to its factory

settings.

In this case, all personal data (e.g. address book

entries, entries in the destination memory and

the list of last destinations of the navigation sys-

tem), among other things, is deleted.

컄컄

244

Control systems

COMAND vehicle menu

In this menu, you can program the follow-

ing vehicle functions:

Setting night security illumination

(Exterior Lighting Delayed Switch-off)

Use this function to set whether and how

long you would like the exterior lighting to

illuminate during darkness after exiting the

vehicle and all doors closed.

The exterior lighting automatically goes

out after the delayed switch-off time has

expired.

You can select:

앫“0 sec.”, the delayed switch-off feature

is deactivated

앫“15 sec.”, “30 sec.”, “45 sec.”, or

“60 sec.”, the delayed switch-off fea-

ture is activated

왘Select “Vehicle”.

The main area is active.

왘Selecting “Exterior Lighting Delayed

Switch-off” menu: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Selecting length of time: Slide qmr

or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Select “Vehicle”  “Vehicle”  “Exte-

rior Lighting Delayed Switch-off”.

A selection list appears.

The current setting is indicated by a

dot R.

Function Page

Exterior Lighting Delayed

Switch-off

244

Locator Lighting 245

Exterior Mirror Convenience Set-

tings

246

Automatic Locking 247

Easy Entry/Exit Feature 248

Interior Ambient Light 249

Interior Lighting Delayed

Switch-off

250

Rear-window Sunshade 251

Trunk Opening-height Restriction* 251

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

iYou can reactivate this function within

10 minutes by opening a door.

컄컄

245

Control systems

COMAND vehicle menu

왘Selecting length of time: Slide qmr

or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

To activate night security illumination:

왘Select delayed switch-off period (see

above).

왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to

position * before turning off the en-

gine.

Locator lighting on/off

With the locator lighting feature activated

and the exterior lamp switch in position

*(컄page 371), the following lamps will

switch on during darkness when the vehi-

cle is unlocked from the outside:

앫Parking lamps

앫Tail lamps

앫License plate lamps

앫Front fog lamps

앫Door entry lamps in the mirror

앫Side marker lamps

The locator lighting switches off when the

driver’s door is opened.

If you do not open a door after unlocking

the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps

will switch off automatically after approxi-

mately 40 seconds.

왘Select “Vehicle”.

The main area is active.

왘Selecting “Locator Lighting” func-

tion: Slide omp or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Switching locator lighting on or off:

Press n.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

246

Control systems

COMAND vehicle menu

왘Select “Vehicle”  “Vehicle”  “Loca-

tor Lighting”.

A checkmark appears when the locator

lighting is switched on.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

To activate locator lighting:

왘Make sure the function “Locator Light-

ing” is set.

왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to

position * when exiting the vehicle.

Exterior mirror convenience settings

In the “Exterior Mirror Convenience Set-

tings” menu, you can switch the following

exterior mirror functions on or off:

앫Exterior mirrors automatically fold in

when the vehicle is locked

앫Exterior mirror on front passenger’s

side automatically tilts downward

when the vehicle is reversing

왘Select “Vehicle”.

The main area is active.

왘Selecting “Exterior Mirror Conve-

nience Settings” menu: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Selecting “Fold in automatically

when locking” or “Lower mirror

when reversing”: Rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Slide omp to exit.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

247

Control systems

COMAND vehicle menu

왘Select “Vehicle”  “Vehicle”  “Exte-

rior mirror Convenience Settings”.

A selection list appears.

왘Selecting a function: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

A checkmark appears in the corre-

sponding box when the option has

been selected.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Slide omp to exit.

Automatic locking on/off

Use this function to activate or deactivate

the automatic central locking

(컄page 342). With the automatic central

locking system activated, the vehicle is

centrally locked at vehicle speeds of ap-

proximately 9 mph (15 km/h).

왘Select “Vehicle”.

The main area is active.

왘Selecting “Automatic Locking” func-

tion: Slide omp or rotate ymz.

왘Switching automatic locking on or

off: Press n.

왘Select “Vehicle”  “Vehicle”  “Auto-

matic Locking”.

A checkmark appears when automatic

locking is switched on.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Slide omp to exit.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

248

Control systems

COMAND vehicle menu

Activating easy-entry/exit feature

Use this function to activate and deacti-

vate the easy-entry/exit feature

(컄page 357).

The following settings are available for the

easy-entry/exit feature:

왘Select “Vehicle”.

The main area is active.

왘Selecting “Easy Entry/Exit Feature”

menu: Slide omp or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Select “Vehicle”  “Vehicle”  “Easy

Entry/Exit Feature”.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

A selection list appears.

The current setting is indicated by a

dot R.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

OFF The easy-entry/exit

feature is deactivated.

Steering Column

& Seat

Both the steering col-

umn and the driver’s

seat are moved.

Warning! G

You must make sure no one can become

trapped or injured by the moving steering

wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-en-

try/exit feature is activated.

To stop seat/steering wheel movement, do

one of the following:

앫Press seat adjustment switch

(컄page 348).

앫Move steering wheel adjustment stalk

(컄page 359).

앫Press one of the memory position but-

tons or the memory button M

(컄page 366).

Do not leave children unattended in the ve-

hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Children could open the driver’s door and

unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit

feature, which could result in an accident

and/or serious personal injury.

249

Control systems

COMAND vehicle menu

왘Selecting a setting: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

Setting interior ambient lighting

You can adjust the brightness of the interi-

or lighting on a scale of “0” (off) to “5”

(bright).

왘Select “Vehicle”.

The main area is active.

왘Selecting “Interior Ambient Light”

menu: Slide omp or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Adjusting brightness: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Select “Vehicle”  “Vehicle”  “Interi-

or Ambient Light”.

왘Adjusting brightness: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

컄컄

250

Control systems

COMAND vehicle menu

Setting interior lighting delayed

switch-off

Use this function to set whether and how

long you would like the interior lighting to

remain lit during darkness after you have

removed the SmartKey from the starter

switch.

You can select:

앫“0 sec.”, the delayed switch-off feature

is deactivated

앫“15 sec.”, “30 sec.”, “45 sec.”, or

“60 sec.”, the delayed switch-off fea-

ture is activated

왘Select “Vehicle”.

The main area is active.

왘Selecting “Interior Lighting Delayed

Switch-off” menu: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

A selection list appears.

The current setting is indicated by a

dot R.

왘Selecting length of time: Slide qmr

or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Select “Vehicle”  “Vehicle”  “Interi-

or Lighting Delayed Switch-off”.

A selection list appears.

The current setting is indicated by a

dot R.

왘Selecting length of time: Slide qmr

or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

컄컄

251

Control systems

COMAND vehicle menu

왔Extending or retracting rear window sunshade

This function is used to extend or retract

the rear sunshade.

왘Select “Vehicle”.

The main area is active.

왘Selecting “Rear-window Sunshade”

function: Slide omp or rotate ymz.

왘Extending or retracting rear window

sunshade: Press n.

왘Select “Vehicle”  “Vehicle” 

“Rear-window Sunshade”.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

Trunk opening-height restriction*

on/off

Vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-

tem*:

You can select whether the trunk lid should

open fully or only to the height of the roof.

왘Select “Vehicle”.

The main area is active.

왘Selecting “Trunk Opening-height Re-

striction” function: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

iIf you operate the rear-window sunshade via

COMAND or by using the favorite button

(컄page 240), this takes precedence over the

buttons for the rear window sunshade in the rear

doors (컄page 503).

iYou can program this function using the fa-

vorite button (컄page 240).

iAt temperatures below -4°F (-20°C), the

rear window sunshade is switched off.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

252

Control systems

COMAND vehicle menu

왘Select “Vehicle”  “Vehicle”  “Trunk

Opening-height Restriction”.

A checkmark appears when the trunk

opening-height restriction is switched

on.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

253

Control systems

COMAND automatic climate control

COMAND automatic climate

control

You can operate the automatic climate

control via COMAND or via the buttons on

the front and rear* automatic climate con-

trol panel (컄page 469).

Some of the special climate control func-

tions can only be set via COMAND.

The following automatic climate control

functions can be operated via COMAND:

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

Warning! G

When operating the automatic climate con-

trol, the air that enters the passenger com-

partment through the air vents can be very

hot or very cold (depending on the set tem-

perature). This may cause burns or frostbite

to unprotected skin in the immediate area of

the air vents.

Always keep sufficient distance between un-

protected parts of the body and the air

vents. If necessary, use the air distribution

adjustment (컄page 255) to direct the air to

air vents in the vehicle interior that are not

in the immediate area of unprotected skin.

Warning! G

Follow the recommended settings for heat-

ing and cooling given on the following pages

and pages in the “Controls in detail” part

(컄page 469) Otherwise the windows could

fog up, impairing visibility and endangering

you and others.

Function Page

Temperature 254

Air distribution 255

Air volume 255

Switching off cooling (“ACOFF”) 256

Central climate control (“Mono”) 257

Footwell temperature 257

Air flow from air vents 258

Rear climate control* 259

254

Control systems

COMAND automatic climate control

The automatic climate control menu is

called up via the climate control settings.

Climate control settings with functions

(submenus)

1Temperature, left

2Air distribution, left

3Air volume, left

4Central menu, climate control

5Air volume, right

6Air distribution, right

7Temperature, right

Setting temperature

Use the temperature controls %$

(컄page 469) in the center console or

COMAND climate control settings to sepa-

rately adjust the air temperature on each

side of the passenger compartment.

왘Select climate control settings  Tem-

perature, left or right and then

press n.

왘Changing temperature: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Exiting menu: Press n, back

button L in the center console

(컄page 86) or slide omp.

The setting is saved.

255

Control systems

COMAND automatic climate control

Adjusting air distribution

You can adjust the air distribution sepa-

rately for the driver’s and front passenger’s

side.

왘Select climate control settings  Air

distribution, left or right.

왘Changing air distribution:

Rotate ymz.

The symbol for air distribution changes.

The direction and size of the arrows

represent the air distribution.

왘Exiting menu: Press n, back

button L in the center console

(컄page 86) or slide omp.

The setting is saved.

Adjusting air volume

Use buttons Q (컄page 469) in the cen-

ter console or COMAND climate control

settings to separately adjust the air vol-

ume on each side of the passenger com-

partment.

왘Select climate control settings  Air

volume, left or right.

왘Changing air volume: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Exiting menu: Press n, back

button L in the center console

(컄page 86) or slide omp.

The setting is saved.

iWhen you change the air distribution, the au-

tomatic function of the climate control system is

switched off.

iWhen you change the air volume, the auto-

matic function of the climate control system is

switched off.

컄컄

256

Control systems

COMAND automatic climate control

Central climate control menu via

COMAND

The central climate control menu is in the

center of the climate control settings.

When the automatic climate control is

switched on, you will see “on” in the cen-

tral menu. The following functions can only

be operated in the central climate control

menu via COMAND:

왘Select climate control settings  Cen-

tral menu.

Switching cooling on or off

The cooling function, only operational

when the engine is running, cools the vehi-

cle interior down to the selected tempera-

ture. The cooling function also

dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,

thus preventing the windows from fogging

up.

The “ACOFF” function is used to permanent-

ly switch off the cooling function of the au-

tomatic climate control system.

왘Select climate control settings  Cen-

tral climate control menu.

Function Page

Switching off cooling (“ACOFF”) 256

Central climate control (“Mono”) 257

Footwell temperature 257

Air flow from air vents 258

Rear climate control* 259

iCondensation may drip out from underneath

the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication

of a malfunction.

Warning! G

If you turn off the cooling function, the

vehicle will not be cooled when weather

conditions are warm. The windows can fog

up more quickly. Window fogging may

impair visibility and endanger you and

others.

컄컄

257

Control systems

COMAND automatic climate control

왘Selecting “ACOFF”: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

A checkmark appears when the cooling

is switched off.

“ACOFF” appears in the central menu of

the climate control settings.

Selecting “Mono” mode

“Mono” is used to adjust the climate zones

for the entire vehicle at the same time.

When the “Mono” function is switched on

and you change the climate on the driver’s

side, these changes will be carried out in

the same manner for all climate zones.

왘Select climate control settings  Cen-

tral climate control menu.

왘Selecting “Mono”: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

A checkmark appears when the func-

tion has been selected.

왘Exiting menu: Press back button L

in the center console (컄page 86) or

slide omp.

The “Mono” function is automatically

switched off when you:

앫change an automatic climate control

setting for the front passenger’s side

using COMAND

앫operate a button from the automatic

climate control for the front passen-

ger’s side

앫operate one of the buttons for the rear

climate control system

Adjusting footwell temperature

The “Footwell Temperature” function is

used to adjust the temperature difference

between the footwell and the rest of the

passenger compartment.

The higher the selected value, the higher

the temperature in the footwell will be.

왘Select climate control settings  Cen-

tral climate control menu.

!If the air conditioning cannot be turned on

again, this indicates that the air conditioning is

losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned it-

self off.

Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

iIn automatic mode, this setting optimizes

the footwell temperature when outside tempera-

tures are low.

258

Control systems

COMAND automatic climate control

왘Selecting “Footwell Temperature”:

Slide qmr or rotate ymz and then

press n.

왘Changing temperature difference:

Slide qmr or rotate ymz.

왘Exiting menu: Press n, back

button L in the center console

(컄page 86) or slide omp.

The setting is saved.

Adjusting air flow from air vents

The “Airflow” setting defines air distribu-

tion and air volume in automatic mode:

앫“Focused” (default setting, increased

air flow)

앫“Medium” (reduced air flow)

앫“Diffuse” (minimal air flow)

왘Select climate control settings  Cen-

tral climate control menu  “Airflow”.

A selection list appears.

The current setting is indicated by a

dot R.

왘Changing air flow: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

iIn automatic mode, this setting optimizes

the air flow when outside temperatures are high.

iWhen the interior ambient temperature of

the vehicle is very hot and the automatic climate

control is cooling the interior, the setting for air

flow is temporarily overridden.

259

Control systems

COMAND automatic climate control

왔Operating rear climate control* from the front

The “Rear)” function is used to oper-

ate the rear climate control via COMAND

and the buttons on the center console con-

trol unit (컄page 477).

Switching on rear climate control oper-

ation from the front

왘Select climate control settings  Cen-

tral climate control menu.

왘Selecting “Rear)”: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

In the climate control settings, “)”

appears in the central menu. The rear

climate control can be operated from

the front.

Climate control settings, rear climate

control

1Rear temperature, left

2Rear air distribution, left

3Rear air volume

4Central menu for rear climate control

5Rear air distribution, right

6Rear temperature, right

The rear climate control is operated in the

same manner as the climate control sys-

tem for the driver’s and front passenger’s

side (컄page 253).

Central menu for rear climate control

In the central menu for the rear climate

control, you can:

앫switch back to operating the front cli-

mate control system

앫switch off the rear climate control

앫switch the automatic function of the

rear climate control from automatic to

manual

왘Select climate control settings  Cen-

tral climate control menu.

컄컄

260

Control systems

COMAND automatic climate control

Switching off rear climate control oper-

ation from the front

왘Select climate control settings  Cen-

tral climate control menu.

The current setting is indicated by a

dot R.

왘Selecting “Front Climate Control”:

Slide qmr or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

The climate control settings shows the

climate control settings for the driver

and front passenger.

Switching off rear climate control

왘Select climate control settings  Cen-

tral climate control menu.

The current setting is indicated by a

dot R.

왘Selecting “Rear Climate Control

OFF”: Slide qmr or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

The rear climate control is switched off.

Switching on the automatic function of

the rear climate control

왘Select climate control settings  Cen-

tral climate control menu.

The current setting is indicated by a

dot R.

왘Selecting “Rear Automatic”:

Slide qmr or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

The automatic function of the rear cli-

mate control is switched on.

컄컄

261

Control systems

COMAND seats

When adjusting the seats, observe the

safety notes in the section “Seats”

(컄page 347).

Operating seats via COMAND

The following seat adjustments can be

made via COMAND:

Selecting a seat

You must first select the seat for which you

would like to make adjustments.

1Seat menu button

왘Press O.

The main area is active.

왘Switching to the bottom menu line:

Slide qmr.

Example illustration (vehicles with Drive-dy-

namic multicontour seat*)

왘Selecting seat: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

Exiting menu

There are several ways to exit the multi-

contour seat menu.

왘Press O again.

왘Press any shortcut button.

iThe components and operating principles of

COMAND can be found on (컄page 85).

Settings Page

Lumbar support 262

Multicontour seats*, front 262

Drive-dynamic multicontour

seats*, front

264 컄컄

262

Control systems

COMAND seats

왘Select another main function from the

main menu line.

Lumbar support

To support the spine, you can adjust the

curvature of the front seat backrests.

왘Press O.

The main area of the COMAND display

is active. A scale appears.

1Scale

2Cursor

3Current seat

4Current setting

왘Select seat (컄page 261).

왘Adjusting lumbar support:

Slide omp or rotate ymz until desired

setting is reached.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

왘Switching to the bottom menu line:

Slide omp.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

Multicontour seats*, front

To support the spine, you can individually

adjust the backrest contour of the front

seats by regulating the air pressure in the

air chambers of the multicontour seat.

The settings are made on the COMAND

display.

You can adjust the following air chambers:

앫sides of seat cushion

앫sides of backrest

앫backrest curvature in lumbar area

앫backrest curvature in shoulder area

iAfter you have pressed O, the seat last

adjusted is active.

iIf PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the air

pressure in the air chambers (on the sides of the

seat cushion and backrest) of the front multicon-

tour seats is increased.

iWhen you adjust the multicontour seat,

noises may result from pumping air into or re-

leasing air out of the air chambers.

컄컄

263

Control systems

COMAND seats

Adjusting sides of seat cushion

This function is used to adjust the air

chambers in the sides of the seat cushion.

왘Select seat (컄page 261).

왘Selecting “Seat sides”: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

A scale appears.

1Scale

2Cursor

3Current setting

왘Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired

setting is reached.

왘Saving setting: Press n.

Adjusting backrest sides

This function is used to adjust the air

chambers in the backrest sides.

왘Select seat (컄page 261).

왘Selecting “Seatback Sides”:

Slide qmr or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

A scale appears.

왘Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired

setting is reached.

왘Saving setting: Press n.

Adjusting backrest curvature in lumbar

area

This function is used to adjust the air

chambers in the lumbar area of the back-

rest.

왘Select seat (컄page 261).

왘Selecting “Lumbar”: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

Cross-hairs appear. You can use them

to make two settings:

앫vertical: shift the point of greatest

curvature upward or downward

앫horizontal: adjust the degree of

curvature

264

Control systems

왘Slide qmr or omp until desired setting

is reached.

왘Saving setting: Press n.

Adjusting backrest curvature in

shoulder area

This function is used to adjust the air

chambers in the shoulder area of the back-

rest.

왘Select seat (컄page 261).

왘Selecting “Shoulders”: Slide omp or

rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

A scale appears.

왘Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired

setting is reached.

왘Saving setting: Press n.

Drive-dynamic multicontour seats*,

front

For information on manual multicontour

seat settings, see “Multicontour seats*,

front” (컄page 262).

The Drive-dynamic multicontour seat auto-

matically adjusts the lateral support pro-

vided by the backrest to your driving style.

The Drive-dynamic multicontour seat elec-

tronically controls the air pressure in the

air chambers of the backrest side bolsters.

This function improves driving comfort and

pleasure.

왘Select seat (컄page 261).

왘Selecting “Driv. dyn. seat”:

Slide omp or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

iIf PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the air

pressure in the air chambers (sides of seat cush-

ion and backrest) of the drive-dynamic multicon-

tour seats is increased.

265

Control systems

COMAND seats

A scale appears. You can choose be-

tween:

앫“0”: off

앫“1”: level 1

앫“2”: level 2

왘Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired

setting is reached.

왘Saving setting: Press n.

Pulse mode

왘Select seat (컄page 261).

왘Selecting “Pulse Mode”: Slide omp

or rotate ymz.

왘Confirming selection: Press n.

A list appears. You can choose be-

tween different types of massage:

The current setting is indicated by a

solid circle.

왘Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired

setting is reached.

왘Saving setting: Press n.

iDepending on the setting, the massage

function runs for about 7 to 10 minutes.

266

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

Instrument cluster control

system

The control system is activated as soon as

the SmartKey in the starter switch is

turned to position 2 or as soon as the

KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button

(컄page 346) is in position 2. The control

system enables you to:

앫call up information about your vehicle

앫change vehicle settings

For example, you can use the control sys-

tem to find out when your vehicle is next

due for service, to call up statistical data

on your vehicle, and much more.

The control system relays information to

the multifunction display.

Multifunction display

1Line for main menus

2Text field in multifunction display

Settings, functions, submenus as well as

any malfunctions are shown to you in the

text field.

Warning! G

A driver’s attention to the road and traffic

conditions must always be his/her primary

focus when driving.

For your safety and the safety of others, se-

lecting features through the multifunction

steering wheel should only be done by the

driver when traffic and road conditions per-

mit it to be done safely.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-

ly 14 m) every second.

267

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

Multifunction steering wheel

The displays in the multifunction display

and the settings in the control system are

controlled using the buttons on the multi-

function steering wheel.

The information available in the multifunc-

tion display is arranged in menus, each

containing a number of functions or sub-

menus. For example, in the “Settings”

menu, you will find functions for making

settings to your vehicle. There are func-

tions for calling up information and for

making settings to your vehicle.

It is helpful to think of the menus as being

arranged in a circular pattern:

왘Press & or ( repeatedly to

switch menus.

The number of menus available in the sys-

tem depends on which optional equipment

is installed in your vehicle.

왘Press button L to return to the next

highest menu level.

From a menu’s highest level, you will al-

ways see the screen from the “Trip” menu

that was last active. When you press L

again, you switch to the standard display

(컄page 270).

For information about warning and mal-

function messages appearing in the multi-

function display (컄page 612).

1Multifunction display

2sto take a call

to dial

to redial

tto end a call

to reject an incoming call

æto increase volume

çto decrease volume

Fto mute

3!to accept a call

to activate Voice Control*

4Lback/to cancel Voice

Control*

5$to scroll up

%to scroll down

&to scroll to the right

(to scroll to the left

#to confirm selection

268

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

Menus

Trip (컄page 270) Navi (컄page 271) Audio (컄page 273) AMG1 (컄page 275)

1S63AMG and S65AMG only.

Commands/submenus

Standard display Showing route guidance in-

structions, current direction

traveled

Selecting radio station Gear currently engaged

Engine oil temperature

Vehicle supply voltage

Fuel consumption statistics since start Selecting satellite radio

channel* (USA only)

RACETIMER

Fuel consumption statistics since last

reset

Operating DVD changer/

audio CD/ audio DVD/MP3

Overall analysis

Resetting fuel consumption statistics Operating Video DVD Lap analysis

Distance to empty

Digital speedometer

269

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

Telephone* (컄page 278) Assistance* (컄page 281) Service (컄page 282) Settings (컄page 283)

Commands/submenus

Dialing a number from the

phone book

Displaying the distance graph-

ic*, DISTRONIC Plus*

(USA only)

Calling up vehicle malfunction,

warning and system status

messages stored in memory

Setting daytime running lamp

mode (USA only)

Redialing Activating/deactivating

PRE-SAFE® Brake* (USA only)

Checking tire inflation pres-

sure

Switching additional speedome-

ter on or off

Answering a call Switching on the Dynamic

Rear View Monitor*

automatically

Calling up maintenance ser-

vice display

Switching radar sensors* on or

off (USA only)

Ending a call or rejecting an in-

coming call

Checking engine oil level*

270

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

Trip menu

In the “Trip” menu, you can show an addi-

tional display for the speedometer and call

up or reset your vehicle’s statistical data.

Standard display

In the standard display, the trip odometer

and main odometer are shown in the mul-

tifunction display.

왘Press ( or & to select the “Trip”

menu.

1Main odometer

2Trip odometer

Fuel consumption statistics since start

왘Press ( or & to select the “Trip”

menu.

왘Press % to select “After start”.

1Distance driven since start

2Time elapsed since start

3Average speed since start

4Average fuel consumption since start

Fuel consumption statistics since last

reset

왘Press ( or & to select the “Trip”

menu.

왘Press % or $ to select “After re-

set”.

1Distance driven since last reset

2Time elapsed since last reset

3Average fuel consumption since last re-

set

4Average speed since last reset

iThe menu overview can be found on

(컄page 268).

iAll values that are based on the last start are

reset when you turn off the vehicle’s engine for

more than four hours (컄page 397).

iIf you turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2

again during this time, the values will not be re-

set. After 999 hours or 9999 miles (kilometers),

the fuel consumption statistics since start are

automatically reset.

iAfter 9999 hours or 99999 miles (kilome-

ters), the fuel consumption statistics since last

reset are automatically reset.

271

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

Resetting fuel consumption statistics

왘Press ( or & to select the “Trip”

menu.

왘Press % or $ to select the func-

tion you wish to reset.

왘Press #.

Illustration: Reset trip odometer

왘Press % to select “Yes” and confirm

with #.

Distance to empty

왘Press ( or & to select the “Trip”

menu.

왘Press % or $ to select “Range”.

The calculated remaining driving range

based on the current fuel tank level ap-

pears in the multifunction display.

Digital speedometer

왘Press ( or & to select the “Trip”

menu.

왘Press % or $ to select the digital

speedometer.

1Digital speedometer

Navi menu

The display in the “Navi” menu depends on

whether route guidance is active or not.

왘Press ( or & to select the “Navi”

menu.

Route guidance not active

The multifunction display shows the direc-

tion of travel and the name of the street

you are currently driving on, if known by

the navigation system.

1Direction of travel

2Street you are currently driving on

iYou can reset the trip odometer by pressing

and holding the L button. The trip odometer

is then reset without confirmation.

iIf only very little fuel is left in the tank, a fuel

pump is shown instead of the range.

iThe menu overview can be found on

(컄page 268).

컄컄

272

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

Route guidance active

The image on the multifunction display de-

pends on whether you are being notified of

a driving maneuver.

No notification of driving maneuver

Example illustration

1Distance to destination

2Symbol for “follow the course of the

road”

3Distance to next driving maneuver

4Street you are currently driving on

Notification of driving maneuver with-

out lane recommendation

Example illustration

1Street into which the driving maneuver

leads

2Symbol for “driving maneuver”

3Distance to driving maneuver and visu-

al distance display

When you are being notified of a driving

maneuver, you will see a visual distance

display 3 next to the driving maneuver

symbol. The visual distance display is re-

duced from bottom to top the closer you

come to the announced driving maneuver.

Navigation status displays in the instru-

ment cluster

While route guidance is active, the follow-

ing messages may be shown on the multi-

function display:

앫<

You have reached your destination.

앫“Area of dest. reached”

You have arrived in the area of your

destination. The message appears, for

example, for relatively large POIs.

앫“New Route…”

COMAND calculates a new route, e.g.

because you have deviated from the

calculated route or due to a detour re-

port. Afterward, COMAND continues

route guidance.

컄컄

273

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

앫“Calculating Route”

COMAND is calculating a route. After-

ward, COMAND starts route guidance.

앫“Off Map”

The vehicle’s location is outside of the

digital map’s range. The vehicle is in an

off-map position (컄page 213).

앫“Off Road”

The vehicle is either on a road that has

not been digitized (컄page 214) or on

the side of a road, e.g. in a parking

space.

앫“No Route”

COMAND cannot calculate a route to

the selected destination.

앫“Direction of Dest.”

The vehicle has gone off the map dur-

ing route guidance (컄page 213).

Audio menu

The functions in the “Audio” menu operate

the audio equipment which you currently

have turned on.

If no audio equipment is currently turned

on, the message: “Audio off” is shown in

the multifunction display.

Selecting radio station

왘Turn on COMAND and select “Radio”

(컄page 100).

왘Press ( or & to select the “Au-

dio” menu.

왘Press % or $ to select a station.

1Station frequency

2Waveband

왘Press æ or ç to adjust the vol-

ume.

Selecting satellite radio* channel

(USA only)

The satellite radio is treated as a radio ap-

plication.

왘Turn on COMAND and select “Sat Ra-

dio” (컄page 105).

iThe menu overview can be found on

(컄page 268).

iYou can only change the frequency band

and save new stations using COMAND

(컄page 100).

컄컄

274

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

왘Press ( or & to select the “Au-

dio” menu.

왘Press % or $ to select a station.

1Channel number and/or name

2SAT mode

왘Press æ or ç to adjust the vol-

ume.

Operating DVD changer/audio CD/

audio DVD/MP3

왘Turn on COMAND and select “CD”,

“DVD-Audio” or “MP3” (컄page 112).

왘Press ( or & to select the “Au-

dio” menu.

왘Press % or $ to select a track.

Example: audio CD

1Current track

왘Press æ or ç to adjust the vol-

ume.

Operating video DVD (USA only)

왘Turn on COMAND and select “Video”

 “Video”  “Video DVD”

(컄page 126).

왘Press ( or & to select the “Au-

dio” menu.

1Current scene

2Disc number

왘Press % or $ to select a scene.

i A subscription to SIRIUS satellite radio ser-

vice provider is required for the satellite radio op-

eration. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center for details and availability for your

vehicle.

For more information on satellite radio

(컄page 105). iWhen you play a CD or DVD with text, the

multifunction display shows the name and num-

ber of the track. For MP3s, only the track is

shown.

컄컄

275

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

AMG menu

The main screen of the AMG menu shows

you

앫the gear currently engaged

앫the engine oil temperature

앫the vehicle supply voltage

왘Press ( or & to select the

“AMG” menu.

1Gear indicator

2Upshift indicator

3Engine oil temperature

4Vehicle supply voltage

If the engine reaches the overspeed range

in the manual shift program, you will see

“up” 2 next to gear indicator 1 as a re-

minder to upshift.

Use buttons % or $ to select the fol-

lowing functions in the AMG menu:

RACETIMER

The RACETIMER allows you to time and

save driving stretches in hours, minutes

and seconds.

왘Press ( or & to select the

“AMG” menu.

왘Press % to select the RACETIMER.

iThis function is only available in S 63 AMG

and S 65 AMG.

iThe engine oil temperature symbol will be

shown in blue if the engine oil temperature has

not yet reached 176°F (80°C). During this time,

avoid driving at full engine speed.

Function Page

RACETIMER 275

Overall analysis 277

Lap analysis 277

Warning! G

The RACETIMER feature is for use only on

roads and in conditions where high speed

driving is permitted. Racing on public roads

is prohibited under all circumstances and

the driver is and must always remain re-

sponsible for following posted speed limits.

컄컄

276

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

1Gear indicator

2RACETIMER

3Seconds display

4Lap

왘Starting RACETIMER: Press æ.

왘Displaying intermediate time:

Press ç.

The intermediate time is shown for

5 seconds.

왘Stopping RACETIMER: Press æ.

왘To select a different display, press

$, ( or &.

Saving lap time and starting a new lap

왘Press button ç while the timer is

running.

The intermediate time will be shown for

5 seconds.

왘Press button ç within 5 seconds.

The intermediate time shown will be

saved as a lap time.

The RACETIMER begins timing the new

lap. The new lap begins to be timed as

soon as the intermediate time is called

up.

1Gear indicator

2RACETIMER

3Best lap time

iYou can start the RACETIMER when the en-

gine is running or the starter switch is in

position 2 (컄page 344).

iWhile the RACETIMER is being displayed,

you cannot adjust the audio volume using but-

tons æ or ç.

iWhen you stop the vehicle and turn the

Smartkey to position 1 (컄page 344) or, in vehi-

cles with KEYLESS-GO*, turn off the engine and

do not open the driver’s door, the RACETIMER

stops timing. Timing is resumed when you switch

the ignition back on or restart the engine and

then press æ button.

iWhen you switch on the Night View Assist*

(컄page 461) while the RACETIMER is operating,

the RACETIMER will continue to run in the back-

ground but cannot be operated with the multi-

function steering wheel buttons.

To stop the RACETIMER, switch off the Night

View Assist* first.

iYou can save up to 16 laps.

컄컄

277

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

Resetting current lap

왘Press button æ while the timer is

running.

The timer stops.

왘Press button ç.

The lap time is reset to “0”.

Deleting all laps

왘Press button æ while the timer is

running.

The timer stops.

왘Press ç for at least 3 seconds.

왘Press button æ.

The timer starts. The saved laps are de-

leted.

Overall analysis

왘Press ( or & to select the

“AMG” menu.

왘Press $ repeatedly until the overall

analysis appears in the multifunction

display.

1Overall analysis of RACETIMER

2Overall driving time

3Maximum speed

4Overall distance driven

5Average speed

왘To select a different display, press

$, ( or &.

Lap analysis

왘Press ( or & to select the

“AMG” menu.

왘Press $ repeatedly until the lap

analysis appears in the multifunction

display.

1Lap number

2Lap time

3Maximum speed

4Lap length

5Average speed during lap

왘Press $ or % to see other lap

analyses.

iIt is not possible to delete a single saved lap.

iThese functions are only available if you

have saved at least one lap and have stopped the

RACETIMER.

iThese functions are only available if you

have saved at least two laps and have stopped

RACETIMER.

컄컄

278

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

왘To select a different display, press

( or &.

Telephone* menu

You can use the functions in the “Tele-

phone” menu to operate your telephone,

provided it is inserted in the cradle and

switched on.

iEach lap is shown in its own submenu. The

fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol 1.

iThe menu overview can be found on

(컄page 268).

Warning! G

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from

using a cellular telephone while driving.

Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety

reasons, the driver should not use the cellu-

lar telephone while the vehicle is in motion.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location before

placing or answering a call.

If you nonetheless choose to use the mobile

phone while driving, please use the hands-

free feature and be sure to pay attention to

the traffic situation at all times. Use the mo-

bile phone only when road, weather and traf-

fic conditions permit.

Otherwise, you may not be able to observe

traffic conditions and could endanger your-

self and others.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet (approxima-

tely 14 m) every second.

Warning! G

Never operate radio transmitters equipped

with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-

out being connected to an external antenna)

from inside the vehicle while the engine is

running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-

tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-

sibly resulting in an accident and/or

personal injury.

컄컄

279

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

Logging-on to a network

왘Switch on the telephone and COMAND

(컄page 85).

왘Press ( or & to select the “Tele-

phone” menu.

Which messages appear in the multifunc-

tion display depends on whether your tele-

phone is switched on or off.

앫If the telephone is off, the message in

the multifunction display is: “Telephone

OFF”.

앫If the telephone is not inserted in the

cradle, the message in the multifunc-

tion display is: “No telephone inserted”.

앫If the PIN or unlock code is not yet en-

tered, the message in the multifunction

display is “Please enter PIN” or “Enter

unlock code”.

앫If the telephone is switched on, the

telephone will then search for a net-

work. During this time, the multifunc-

tion display is blank. If no network

available, the multifunction display

reads “No Service”.

앫If the telephone is on, as soon as the

telephone has found a network,

“Ready” or “Ready (Roaming)” appears

in the multifunction display.

Entering the PIN or unlock code

왘Enter the PIN or unlock code using the

telephone keypad*, Voice Control* or

telephone*.

The telephone will then search for a

network.

You may carry out the following functions:

Dialing a number from the mobile

phone book

If your telephone is ready to receive calls,

you may select and dial a number from the

phone book at any time.

왘Log on to the network (컄page 279).

iVarious mobile phone cradles can be in-

stalled in the front center armrest, see separate

installation instructions for the mobile phone

cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be ob-

tained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-

ter. For more information about telephone

(컄page 507).

iThe roof cargo container* may impair mo-

bile phone reception. In an emergency, remove

the mobile phone from the mobile phone cradle

(컄page 507) to make a call. Function Page

Dialing a number from the phone

book

279

Redialing 280

Answering a call 281

Ending a call or rejecting an in-

coming call

281

컄컄

280

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

왘Press % or $ or # to switch

to the phone book.

왘Press % or $ to select the de-

sired name.

The stored names are displayed in as-

cending alphabetical order.

왘Press s or # to start dialing.

If several entries are present for the

same name, they are all shown.

왘Select the desired entry.

왘Press s or # to start dialing.

The message “Connecting call…” ap-

pears on the multifunction display, as

well as the dialed telephone number or

name as long as it is stored in the

phone book.

The dialed number is saved in the “Di-

aled numbers” list.

Once a connection has been estab-

lished, the name appears on the multi-

function display, provided that it has

been stored in the phone book, other-

wise the dialed telephone number ap-

pears.

Redialing

The control system stores the most recent-

ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates

the need to search through your entire

phone book.

왘Log on to the network (컄page 279).

왘Press s to switch to the number

and/or name last dialed in the redial

memory.

왘Press % or $ to select the de-

sired number and/or name.

왘Press s or # to start dialing.

Once a connection has been estab-

lished, the name appears in the multi-

function display, provided that it has

been stored in the phone book, other-

wise the dialed telephone number ap-

pears.

iWhen you insert a Mercedes-Benz approved

mobile phone into the cradle*, the control sys-

tem reads in the phone book that is saved on the

SIM card or in the phone book of the mobile

phone. This can take several minutes, depending

on how many entries each phone book contains.

When you press %, $, (, & or

# during the download of the phone book the

message “Reading telephone data, please

wait...” appears in the multifunction display.

When the message: “Reading telephone data,

please wait...” disappears, the phone book has

been loaded.

iIf you do not want to dial from the phone

book, press t or L. In the multifunction

display appears again “Ready” or “Ready (Roam-

ing)”.

iIf you press and hold % or $ for

more than 1 second, the system scrolls

rapidly through the list of names.

If you press and hold % or $ for more than

4 seconds, the control system shows the first

four entries of the letter next used. Release the

button to stop the quick search. The search

stops automatically at the end of the list.

컄컄

281

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

Answering a call

When your telephone is ready to receive

calls, you can answer a call at any time

with the ignition on. When you are in the

“Telephone” menu, you will see the follow-

ing message on the multifunction display:

왘Press s.

Ending a call or rejecting an incoming

call

왘Press t.

Assistance* menu

In the “Assistance” menu, you can change

the settings of your driving systems.

Displaying distance graphic*,

DISTRONIC Plus* (USA only)

For information about displaying distance

graphic (컄page 428).

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®

Brake* (USA only)

왘Press ( or & to select the

“Assistance” menu.

왘Press % or $ to select the

“PRE-SAFE Brake” function.

왘Press #.

1PRE-SAFE® Brake* indicator :

왘Press # again if you would like to

change the current status.

After the function has been activated,

indicator : appears on the

left-hand side of the multifunction dis-

play.

For more information (컄page 76).

Switching on the Dynamic Rear View

Monitor* automatically

왘Press ( or & to select the

“Assistance” menu.

iThe caller’s number appears only if it is

transmitted.

The caller’s name appears only if the number and

the name are stored in the phone book.

iThe menu overview can be found on

(컄page 268).

iThe image from the Dynamic Rear View

Monitor is shown on the COMAND display.

282

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

왘Press % or $ to select the

“Rearview camera” function.

왘Press #.

왘Press # again if you would like to

change the current status.

The following settings are available:

Service menu

The “Service” menu is used for

앫calling up messages

앫checking tire inflation pressure elec-

tronically with the Advanced TPMS*

(standard on U.S. vehicles)

앫activating Run Flat Indicator

(Canada only)

앫calling up the maintenance service in-

dicator display

앫check engine oil level*

Calling up vehicle malfunction, warning

and system status messages stored in

memory

Use the vehicle status message memory

menu to scan malfunction and warning

messages that may be stored in the sys-

tem. Such messages appear in the multi-

function display and are based on

conditions or system status the vehicle’s

system has recorded.

The vehicle status message memory menu

only appears if there are any messages

stored.

왘Press ( or & to select the

“Service” menu.

“On when in

Reverse”

The Dynamic Rear View

Monitor automatically

switches on when reverse

gear is engaged.

“OFF”The Dynamic Rear View

Monitor is not switched on.

iThe menu overview can be found on

(컄page 268).

Warning! G

Malfunction and warning messages are only

indicated for certain systems and are inten-

tionally not very detailed. The malfunction

and warning messages are simply a remind-

er with respect to the operation of certain

systems and do not replace the owner’s

and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain

the vehicle’s operating safety by having all

required maintenance and safety checks

performed on the vehicle and by bringing

the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center to address the malfunction and

warning messages (컄page 612).

283

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

If conditions have occurred causing

status messages to be recorded, the

number of messages appears in the

multifunction display: “2 Messages”.

왘Press % or $ to select the mes-

sage.

왘Press # to confirm.

Checking tire inflation pressure

For information about checking tire infla-

tion pressure (컄page 561).

Activating Run Flat Indicator

(Canada only)

For information about activating Run Flat

Indicator (컄page 565).

Calling up the maintenance service in-

dicator display

For information about calling up the main-

tenance service indicator display

(컄page 582).

Checking engine oil level (S 600 and

S65AMG)

For information about checking engine oil

level (컄page 543).

Settings menu

In the “Settings” menu, you can:

앫switch the daytime running lamps on or

off (USA only)

앫switch the additional speedometer on

or off

앫switch the radar sensors* on or off

(USA only)

Setting daytime running lamp mode

(USA only)

왘Press ( or & to select the “Set-

tings” menu.

왘Press % or $ to select the “Day-

time driving lamps” function.

왘Press #.

왘Press # again if you would like to

change the current status.

Depending on the previous status, the

daytime running lamps will be switched

on or off.

iSee the “Practical hints” section for mal-

function and warning messages (컄page 612).

iIf you turn the SmartKey in the starter

switch to position 0 and then back to position 2,

all messages will be deleted from the message

memory. iThe menu overview can be found on

(컄page 268).

iThis function is not available in countries

where the daytime running lamp mode is manda-

tory and therefore in a constant mode.

284

Control systems

With “Daytime driving lamps” mode selected and the exterior lamp switch at position M or *, the low beam headlamps are

switched on when the engine is running.

In low ambient light conditions the follow-

ing lamps will switch on additionally:

앫Parking lamps

앫Tail lamps

앫License plate lamps

앫Side marker lamps

For more information on the daytime run-

ning lamp mode (컄page 373).

Showing or hiding additional

speedometer

You can have an additional digital speed-

ometer shown on the multifunction dis-

play. The speed is shown in the unit of

kilometers/hour (USA) or miles/hour

(Canada).

왘Press ( or & to select the “Set-

tings” menu.

왘Press % or $ to select the “Add.

speedometer” function.

왘Press #.

왘Press # again if you would like to

change the current status.

Depending on the previous status, the

additional speedometer will be

switched on or off.

Switching radar sensors* on/off

If your vehicle is equipped with DISTRONIC

Plus*, BAS Plus*, or Park Assist* it is

equipped with a radar sensor system

which you can switch on and off.

When travelling in Canada in a vehicle not

registered in Canada, you must switch off

the radar sensor system. Canadian law

does not permit the use of the radar sensor

system for vehicles from outside of Cana-

da. When you switch off the radar sensor

system, the following functions are deacti-

vated:

앫BAS Plus* (컄page 69)

앫DISTRONIC Plus* (컄page 424)

앫Park Assist* (컄page 448)

앫PRE-SAFE® Brake* (컄page 76)

iIf you turn the exterior lamp switch to anoth-

er position, the corresponding lamp(s) will

switch on.

iMake sure that the light switch is set

to B or * when you switch off the day-

time running lamps while driving at night.

285

Control systems

Instrument cluster control system

왔

왘Press ( or & to select the “Set-

tings” menu.

왘Press % or $ to select the “Ra-

dar sensor” function.

왘Press #.

왘Press # again if you would like to

change the current status.

Depending on the previous status, the

radar sensors will be switched on or

off.

iUSA only:

This device has been approved by the FCC as a

“Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is

intended for use in an automotive radar system

only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the de-

vice will void any warranties, and is not permitted

by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in

any non-approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

iCanada only:

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will

void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not

tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved

way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

iThe selected status of the radar sensors re-

mains stored in memory even if the engine is

turned off and restarted.

iThe following message appears in the multi-

function display if the radar sensors are

switched off and you attempt to activate DIS-

TRONIC Plus*, Park Assist* or PRE-SAFE®

Brake*:

“Radar sensor

deactivated

See Oper. Manual”

286

Control systems

Voice Control*

Operating safety

Warning! G

Please devote your attention first and fore-

most to the traffic situation you are in. While

the system permits hands-free phone oper-

ation, attention to traffic may be diverted

not only by physical operation of a phone,

but also by the distraction of a phone con-

versation while driving. As such, for safety

reasons, we encourage the driver to stop the

vehicle in a safe place before answering or

placing a phone call.

For safety reasons, you should only select a

destination when the vehicle is stationary.

While the navigation system provides direc-

tional assistance, the driver must remain fo-

cused on safe driving behavior, especially

attention to traffic and street signs, and

should utilize the system’s audio cues while

driving.

The navigation system does not supply any

information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic

regulations or traffic safety rules. Their ob-

servance always remains in the driver’s per-

sonal responsibility. DVD maps do not cover

all areas nor all routes within an area.

Traffic regulations always have priority over

any route recommendations given.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet

(approximately 13.5 m) every second.

Warning! G

Navigation announcements are intended to

direct you while driving without diverting

your attention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of

consulting the map display for directions.

Consulting the symbols or map display for

directions may cause you to divert your at-

tention from driving and increase your risk

of an accident.

Warning! G

Please do not use the Voice Control System

in an emergency, as the tone of your voice

may change in a stressful situation. This

could cause a delay in completing your

phone call in a timely manner. This could

distract you in an emergency situation and

cause you to be involved in an accident.

287

Control systems

Voice Control* introduction

The Voice Control System gives you the ca-

pability to control the following systems on

your vehicle using spoken commands:

앫Telephone* (컄page 291)

앫Navigation (컄page 298)

앫Address book (컄page 308)

앫Audio (컄page 312) (AM/FM radio,

CD/DVD changer, MP3 player)

You control these systems using spoken

commands. Moreover, controls such as

the buttons on the multifunction steering

wheel (컄page 289) allow you to keep your

hands on the steering wheel.

The command vocabulary consists of

approximately 300 ready to use phrases.

The Voice Control System recognizes com-

mands and number sequences, irrespec-

tive of the speaker. To optimize speech

recognition for your voice follow the indi-

vidualization process (컄page 333).

You can use the Voice Control System to

call up all of COMAND’s main menu items,

with the exception of the main menus for

“Vehicle” and “Navi”.

The commands and digit sequences can be

spoken without pausing between the indi-

vidual words. If an unavailable or incorrect

command is used, the Voice Control Sys-

tem will prompt you for a new command by

asking “Please repeat” or “Please repeat

your entry”.

In order to provide for a safe and comfort-

able dialog, the Voice Control System ac-

knowledges important commands.

288

Control systems

Voice Control* introduction

Spelling

You may not need to spell the entire name

(street, intersection, city or point of inter-

est) especially if the name is lengthy. Spell-

ing the first three to five characters of the

name should be sufficient for the system

to recognize the name provided it is avail-

able on the navigation DVD.

The selection appearing on the COMAND

display is sorted based on your recognized

voice input and a matching algorithm.

You can use the commands “Next page” or

“Previous page” to scroll up or down in the

list.

Use the command “Correction” to start

over by again spelling the name.

Speak each character as clearly as you

can, especially when they sound very simi-

lar (d or e).

Command types

The Voice Control System commands can

be categorized as:

앫General Commands

These are commands always available

to you as soon as the Voice Control

System is activated (for example

“Help” commands).

앫Local Commands

These are commands specific to the

currently active system shown in the

COMAND display (for example com-

mands to control the CD/DVD chang-

er).

For a complete list of commands

(컄page 318).

Active System

The active system is the system currently

shown in the COMAND display.

If, for example, you listen to the radio while

the telephone system is active on the

COMAND display, you have to switch to

the radio using the command “Radio” be-

fore you can operate the radio.

iDuring Voice Control System operation visu-

al help windows also appear in the COMAND dis-

play (컄page 290).

289

Control systems

Voice Control* introduction

왔Controls

Operation via the multifunction

steering wheel

Activating Voice Control

왘Switch on COMAND (컄page 85).

왘Press !.

An audible tone (beep) confirms the ac-

tivation of the system.

왘Speak a command.

Canceling Voice Control

왘Press L.

왘Speak the command “Cancel”

(except for speaking voice entries, en-

tering a town or city or carrying out in-

dividualization).

왘Press any COMAND button.

Item

1!to activate Voice Control

to accept a call

2Lto cancel Voice Control

3æto increase volume

çto decrease volume

sto take a call

to dial

to redial

tto end a call

to reject an incoming call

iVoice Control can be cancelled at any time,

even during a dialog. Please note that if the Voice

Control System is cancelled during a dialog, then

the complete procedure is stopped and Voice

Control is cancelled.

290

Control systems

Voice Control* introduction

Setting volume level

왘Activate Voice Control.

왘Speak a command, for example “Help”.

왘Press æ or ç. The volume is in-

creased or decreased during voice out-

put.

왘Set volume for voice output using the

COMAND volume thumbwheel on the

lower part of the front center console

(컄page 96).

Displays

COMAND Display

In addition to the acoustic help function,

a visual help function (컄page 239) is avail-

able on the COMAND display.

Upon activating the Voice Control, the

most important available commands for

the currently active system appear on the

COMAND display.

When the Voice Control System requires

additional information from the user, a se-

lection list is shown on the COMAND dis-

play in the address book and navigation

system.

1COMAND display

Multifunction display

For example: telephone numbers are

shown on the multifunction display while

dialing when the main “Telephone” menu

is selected in the instrument cluster con-

trol system.

1Multifunction display

Symbols

The following symbols are found in follow-

ing Voice Control System pages:

sThis symbol stands for commands

and voice entries you are speaking.

tThis symbol stands for voice output

by the system.

uThis symbol indicates that informa-

tion is available on the COMAND

display.

291

Control systems

Voice Control* telephone

Voice Control* telephone Telephone operation

The Voice Control System gives you the

following capabilities:

앫Enter a telephone unlock code

앫Dial a phone number by speaking the

telephone number

앫Store names and numbers in the

COMAND address book

앫Dial a phone number by speaking the

name of an COMAND address book en-

try

앫Delete an address book entry from the

address book

앫Have the system read out the phone

book of the address book entry by en-

try

앫Manage and access an automated an-

swering system/voice mail box

앫Redial names and numbers

Warning! G

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from

using a cellular telephone while driving.

Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety

reasons, the driver should not use the cellu-

lar telephone while the vehicle is in motion.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location before

placing or answering a call.

If you nonetheless choose to use the mobile

phone while driving, please use the hands-

free feature and be sure to pay attention to

the traffic situation at all times. Use the mo-

bile phone only when road, weather and traf-

fic conditions permit. Otherwise, you may

not be able to observe traffic conditions and

could endanger yourself and others.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet (approxima-

tely 14 m) every second.

Warning! G

Never operate radio transmitters equipped

with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-

out being connected to an external antenna)

from inside the vehicle while the engine is

running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-

tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-

sibly resulting in an accident and/or

personal injury.

iVarious mobile phone cradles can be in-

stalled in the front center armrest, see separate

installation instructions for the mobile phone

cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be ob-

tained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-

ter. For more information about telephone

(컄page 507).

iThe roof cargo container* may impair mo-

bile phone reception. In an emergency, remove

the mobile phone from the mobile phone cradle

(컄page 507) to make a call.

292

Control systems

Voice Control* telephone

The Voice Control System detects whether

앫your telephone is switched on

앫the corresponding mobile network is

logged in

앫it is possible to dial

If dialing is not possible, the Voice Control

System will advise you accordingly.

Before you can operate the telephone us-

ing the Voice Control System, you have to

activate the Voice Control (컄page 289).

Telephone commands

For a complete list of commands

(컄page 318).

“Telephone”

Use the command “Telephone” to activate

the telephone main menu. Use this com-

mand if you want the digits you are enter-

ing to appear on the COMAND display.

“Help telephone”

The Voice Control System features a com-

prehensive help function.

Use the command “Help telephone” and

the Voice Control System will read out an

option list of available functions and com-

mands that can be used in conjunction

with the telephone (컄page 239).

“Enter PIN”

Use the command “Enter PIN” to input the

code to unlock your telephone. After

speaking the command, you are prompted

to enter the code.

Speak the code

앫as a continuously spoken string of dig-

its, or

앫in digit blocks of three to five digits.

Digits from “Zero” to “Nine” may be used.

After each digit block (separate the digit

blocks by using an approximately

0.5 second pause), the Voice Control Sys-

tem repeats the recognized digits and

waits until you continue speaking.

Sample dialog:

sEnter PIN

tPlease say the PIN

sZero zero one one

tZero zero one one

sOK

iYou can continue operating your mobile

phone using the telephone keypad or keypad on

your phone.

iThe PIN (only GSM mobile phones) prompt

starts automatically whenever the phone is

locked and you wish to use it.

293

Control systems

Voice Control* telephone

“Dial number”

You can dial a phone number using the

command “Dial number”.

Digits from “Zero” to “Nine” may be used.

The phone number must be spoken

앫as a continuously spoken string of

digits, or

앫in digit blocks (three to five digits in

each block).

After each digit block (separate the digit

blocks by using an approximately 0.5 sec-

ond pause), the Voice Control System re-

peats the recognized digits and waits until

you continue speaking.

When dialing 1800 numbers, you may pro-

nounce the first four digits as “One eight

hundred” and the system will recognize the

spoken entries as “One eight zero zero”.

All other numeric entries must be spoken

as individual numbers.

Sample dialog:

sDial number

tPlease say the number

sOne two three

tOne two three

sFour five six seven

tFour five six seven

sOK

tDialing

“Confirm”

Using the command “Confirm” will repeat

all digits spoken up to that point. Upon re-

peating the digits, the system will prompt

you to continue your input.

Sample dialog:

sDial number

tPlease say the number

sOne two three

tOne two three

sConfirm

tOne two three, please continue

sFour five six seven

tFour five six seven

sOK

tDialing

iYou can also dial the telephone number spo-

ken by pressing button s on the multifunc-

tion steering wheel (instead of using the

command “OK”):

You can dial the telephone number before all

numbers are recited in full.

294

Control systems

Voice Control* telephone

“Correction”

Using the command “Correction” will cor-

rect the last entered digit block. After

speaking the command, the last digit block

is deleted and all previously entered digits

are repeated. The system then prompts

you to continue your input.

Sample dialog:

sDial number

tPlease say the number

sOne two three

tOne two three

sFour five six seven

tFive five six seven

sCorrection

tOne two three, please continue

sFour five six seven

tFour five six seven

sOK

tDialing

“Delete”

Using the command “Delete” will erase all

digits entered. The system then prompts

you to start your input again.

Sample dialog:

sDial number

tPlease say the number

sOne two three

tOne two three

sFour five six seven

tFour five six seven

sDelete

tNumber deleted. Please enter the

number again

sFour two seven three

tFour two seven three

sThree nine one

tThree nine one

sOK

tDialing

“Redial”

Use the command “Redial” to dial the last

dialed number.

“Save name” (COMAND address book)

Use the command “Save name” to create a

new entry in your COMAND address book.

After using the command, the system will

prompt you to enter a phone number.

Digits from “Zero” to “Nine” can be en-

tered (컄page 293).

Speak the telephone number

앫as a continuous string

or, with longer phone numbers,

앫in form of digit blocks (three to five dig-

its).

After each digit block (separate the digit

blocks by using an approximately

0.5 second pause), the Voice Control Sys-

tem repeats the recognized digits and

waits until you continue speaking.

295

Control systems

Voice Control* telephone

After the command “OK”, you will be

prompted up to two times to input the

name. When repeating the name, make

sure that you pronounce it in the same

manner as during the first input. Otherwise

the name cannot be saved and the Voice

Control System cancels the save proce-

dure.

Sample dialog:

sSave name

tPlease say the number first

sOne two three

tOne two three

sFour five six seven

tFour five six seven

sOK

tPlease say the name

sJohn Smith

tPlease repeat the name

sJohn Smith

tDo you want to save the number in

a category?

sNo

tName and number saved

“Dial name” (COMAND address book)

Use the command “Dial name” to place a

phone call by selecting a name previously

saved in your personal address book.

Sample dialog:

sDial name

tPlease say the name

sJohn Smith

If several telephone numbers exist

for the same entry, the Voice Con-

trol System will ask for clarification.

tDo you want to place a work call or

a home call?

sWork

tJohn Smith work

Dialing

iThe Voice Control System may recognize

names even if not saved in your voice. For opti-

mum call-up performance, however, you should

speak and save the names you intend to use

yourself.

iYou can also add a name to an entry by call-

ing up the corresponding menu on COMAND and

saying the name twice (컄page 226).

296

Control systems

“Call <voice entry>” (address book)

Use the command “Call <voice entry>” to

place a phone call by directly selecting a

name previously stored in your address

book.

One address book entry can have up to

three different telephone numbers (mobile

phone/car/land line) for both the home

and work fields.

If only one telephone number is stored for

a given name, you can recall the entry us-

ing the command “Call John Smith”.

If several telephone numbers are associat-

ed with one entry, you can recall the de-

sired telephone number by using the

following commands:

앫“Call John Smith home”

앫“Call John Smith work”

앫“Call John Smith home cell phone”

앫“Call John Smith home car”

앫“Call John Smith home land line”

앫“Call John Smith work cell phone”

앫“Call John Smith work car”

앫“Call John Smith work land line”

The system confirms your input and the

number is dialed.

Sample dialog:

sCall John Smith

If several telephone numbers exist

for the same entry, the Voice Con-

trol System will ask for clarification.

tDo you want to place a work call or

a home call?

sWork

tJohn Smith work

Dialing

“Delete name” (COMAND address book)

Use the command “Delete name” to delete

a name from the COMAND address book.

Sample dialog:

sDelete name

tThe name, please

sSmith office

tSmith office: Would you like to de-

lete the voice name?

sYes

tThe voice name is deleted

297

Control systems

Voice Control* telephone

“List phone book” and dialing a phone

number

Use the command “List phone book” to lis-

ten to all voice entries in the phone book

with a phone number stored, and select an

entry and dial that number.

Sample dialog:

sList phone book

The system reads out the complete

phone book entry by entry.

Selecting an entry and dialing that

number

왘For the desired entry, press ! dur-

ing or immediately after voice output.

If more than one phone number exists

for a given entry, the Voice Control Sys-

tem prompts:

tDo you want to place a work call or

a home call?

sHome

The system reads out the name of

the selected entry and dials the cor-

responding number.

Canceling the dialog

왘Press L.

The system confirms “Cancel”.

The dialog is concluded.

Managing automated answering sys-

tem/voice mail box

Activate the Voice Control System to ac-

cess and manage your answering ma-

chine/voice mail box.

왘Activate the Voice Control System dur-

ing a phone call (컄page 289).

An audible tone (beep) confirms the ac-

tivation of the system.

왘Speak the required digits (“Zero” to

“Nine”).

왘Speak the required words “Star” and

“Pound”.

왘Speak the final command “OK”.

The system dials the number entered.

298

Control systems

Voice Control* navigation

Important notes

Warning! G

For safety reasons, you should only select a

destination when the vehicle is stationary.

While the navigation system provides direc-

tional assistance, the driver must remain fo-

cused on safe driving behavior, especially

attention to traffic and street signs, and

should utilize the system’s audio cues while

driving.

The navigation system does not supply any

information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic

regulations or traffic safety rules. Their ob-

servance always remains in the driver’ per-

sonal responsibility. DVD maps do not cover

all areas nor all routes within an area.

Traffic regulations always have priority over

any route recommendations given.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet

(approximately 13.5 m) every second.

During route guidance, you will not receive

information on:

앫traffic lights

앫stop and yield signs

앫parking or stopping zones

앫one-way streets

앫narrow bridges, or

앫other traffic regulation data.

You should therefore always strictly observe

traffic regulations while driving. Drive care-

fully and always obey traffic laws and road

signs, even if they contradict navigation sys-

tem instructions.

Warning! G

Please do not use the Voice Control System

in an emergency, as the tone of your voice

may change in a stressful situation. This

could cause a delay in completing your

phone call in a timely manner. This could

distract you in an emergency situation and

cause you to be involved in an accident.

299

Control systems

Voice Control* navigation

Navigation operation

The Voice Control System allows you to

앫enter a state or province

앫enter a city

앫spell the name of a city

앫spell the name of district or center

앫spell the name of a street

앫spell the name of an intersection

앫enter a house number

앫enter a complete address

앫select one of your last destinations

앫enter a POI (point of interest)

앫select one of your last destinations

앫save a destination

앫navigate to a destination stored in the

destination memory of the address

book

앫start route guidance

앫display the map

앫zoom in or zoom out of the map

앫listen to the destination memory

앫cancel route guidance

앫turn guide instructions on or off

Before you can operate navigation using

the Voice Control System, you have to ac-

tivate the Voice Control System

(컄page 289).

Selecting navigation mode

왘Press !.

왘Speak the command “Navigation”.

왘Press !.

왘Speak one of the navigation com-

mands.

Warning! G

Navigation announcements are intended to

direct you while driving without diverting

your attention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of

consulting the map display for directions.

Consulting the symbols or map display for

directions may cause you to divert your at-

tention from driving and increase your risk

of an accident.

300

Control systems

Voice Control* navigation

Navigation commands

For a complete list of commands

(컄page 318).

“Help navigation”/“Help”

Use the command “Help navigation” or

“Help” to read out an option list of avail-

able functions and commands that can be

used in conjunction with the navigation

system.

“Enter state”,“Enter province”

Use the command “Enter state” or “Enter

province” to select a different state or

province on the navigation DVD.

Sample dialog:

sEnter state

tPlease say the name of the state

sNew York

uThe system shows a numbered list

of states recognized by the system

tPlease select a line number

sNumber two

or to accept, say

sYes

tState accepted

The selected entry is adopted from the list.

“Last states”

Use the command “Last states” to select a

state or province from among a number of

last selected states or provinces.

Dialog for entering a complete address

“Enter destination”

Use the command “Enter destination” to

enter a complete destination address.

The system guides you through the dialog.

As soon as a valid address has been en-

tered, you can start route guidance or save

the destination. For information on spelling

(컄page 305).

Sample dialog:

sEnter destination

tPlease spell a New York street

name

sB-R-O-A-D-W

iYou cannot start the route guidance until all

necessary address data has been entered.

301

Control systems

Voice Control* navigation

uThe system displays a numbered

list of matching street names on

the COMAND display

tPlease select a line number

sNumber two

tNumber two accepted

tDo you want to enter a house num-

ber?

sNo

tDo you want to enter an intersec-

tion?

sNo

tDo you want to spell the town’s

name?

sYes

tPlease spell the town name

sN-E-W-Y-O-R-K

uThe system displays a numbered

list of matching city names on the

COMAND display

tPlease select a line number

sNumber one

tNumber one accepted

tDo you want to start route guid-

ance?

sYes

tStarting route guidance

The system calculates the route and, upon

completing route calculation, starts route

guidance.

“Points of interest”

Use the command “Points of interest” to

select a point of interest (POI) such as air-

ports, railroad stations, gas stations etc.

Sample dialog:

sPoints of interest

uThe system shows the following list

on the COMAND display:

앫current position

앫other town/city

앫Global POI

tPlease select a line number

sNumber one

uThe system displays a numbered

list of available POI categories:

Select POI category menu

tPlease select a line number

sNumber one

iYou may not need to spell the entire name

(street, intersection, city or point of interest) es-

pecially if the name is lengthy. Spelling the first

three to five characters of the name should be

sufficient for the system to recognize the name

provided it is available on the navigation DVD.

iThe selection appearing on the COMAND

display is sorted based on your recognized voice

input and a matching algorithm.

You can use the commands “Continue” or

“Back” to scroll up or down in the list.

Use the command “Correction” to start over by

again spelling the name.

Speak each character as clearly as you can, es-

pecially when they sound very similar (d or e).

302

Control systems

Voice Control* navigation

uThe system displays a numbered

list search categories: Find menu

tPlease select a line number

sNumber one

uThe system displays a numbered

list of airports sorted by distance

tPlease select a line number

sNumber one

tPoint of interest accepted

tDo you want to start route guid-

ance?

sYes

tStarting route guidance

“Next POI”

With the commands

앫“Next gas station”

앫“Next parking lot”

앫“Next Mercedes-Benz service”

앫“Next restaurant”

앫“Next hospital”

you can select POIs in your vicinity.

Sample dialog:

sNext gas station

uThe system shows a numbered list

of gas stations on the COMAND dis-

play

tPlease select a line number

sNumber one

tNumber one accepted

tDo you want to start route guid-

ance?

sYes

The system calculates the route and, upon

completing route calculation, starts route

guidance.

“Last destinations”

Use the command “Last destinations” to

select a destination from among a number

of destinations last navigated to.

“Save destination”

Use the command “Save destination” to

save the current destination in the address

book.

iDepending on the number of categories and

POI’s available for a given area, the system may

display several lists on each of which you may

have to make a selection by speaking the desired

line number or you have to spell the name of a

POI.

iThe Voice Control System may recognize

names even if not saved in your voice. For best

possible call-up performance, however, you

should speak and save the names you intend to

use yourself.

If an entry is already available in the address

book, the system will ask you if you would like to

add the address to the available entry.

303

Control systems

Voice Control* navigation

Sample dialog:

sSave destination

tPlease say the name

sJohn Smith

tPlease repeat the name

sJohn Smith

tWhere do you want to save: home

or work?

sWork

tThe destination has been saved

“Navigate to <voice entry>” (address

book)

Use the command “Navigate to <voice en-

try>” to start route guidance by selecting

voice entry with a saved destination ad-

dress from the COMAND address book.

A voice entry may have two different desti-

nation addresses associated with it (home

or work).

The system confirms your command, cal-

culates the route, and begins route guid-

ance.

If only one address is stored, you can use

the command “Navigate <voice name>” to

select the stored destination address for

that name.

If two addresses are stored, you can use

the commands

앫“Navigate <voice name> home”

앫“Navigate <voice name> work”

to directly select between home or work

address for that name. The system con-

firms your selection, calculates the route,

and begins route guidance.

Sample dialog:

sNavigate to John Smith

If more than one address exists for

this voice entry, the Voice Control

System will prompt you:

tNavigate to home or work?

sWork

tJohn Smith work

Starting route guidance

304

Control systems

Voice Control* navigation

“Start route guidance”

Use the command “Start route guidance”

to start route guidance after entering a val-

id destination.

Sample dialog:

sStart route guidance

tStarting route guidance

Route guidance begins.

“Guidance instructions on”

Use the command “Guidance instructions

on” to have the Voice Control System re-

peat the last guidance instruction. If guid-

ance voice output was previously muted,

using this command will deactivate the

muting of the voice output.

“Guidance instructions off”

Use the command “Guidance instructions

off” to mute the systems’ guidance voice

output.

“Cancel route guidance”

Use the command “Cancel route guid-

ance” to cancel route guidance.

Sample dialog:

sCancel route guidance

tAre you sure you want to cancel

route guidance?

sYes

Route guidance is canceled.

sNo

tCancel

The dialog with the Voice Control System

is canceled. Route guidance remains ac-

tive.

“Map”

Use the command “Map” to activate or

switch to map display.

“Zoom in”, “Zoom out”

Use these commands to zoom in on map or

to zoom out of map to the desired level of

map detail.

“Zoom in completely”, “Zoom out com-

pletely”

These commands are used to adapt the

map display directly to the smallest or larg-

est map scale.

“List destination memory”

Use the command “List destination memo-

ry” to have the system read out all destina-

tion memory entries and select and entry

for route guidance.

305

Control systems

Voice Control* navigation

Sample dialog:

sList destination memory

The system reads out the address

book destination memory.

To select a voice entry and adopt address

for route guidance:

왘When the system reads the desired en-

try, press !.

If more than one address is available,

the system will prompt you:

tNavigate to home or work?

sHome

The system reads the selected

voice entry and starts route guid-

ance.

To cancel the dialog:

왘Press L.

You have canceled the dialog. The sys-

tem confirms cancellation by saying

“Cancel”.

Commands for entering parts of an

address

“Enter town”

The “Enter town” command is used to en-

ter any larger town or city in the USA or

Canada.

Sample dialog:

sEnter town

tPlease spell the name of the town

sE-A-S-T-O-N

uThe system displays a numbered

list of available city names

tPlease select a line number

sNumber one

tNumber one, town accepted

The city selected is adopted for route guid-

ance.

“Spell town”

Use the command “Spell town” to enter a

city name by spelling mode and see if it

matches an entry available on the naviga-

tion DVD.

Speak the characters as a continuous

string (five to seven characters). The sys-

tem then displays a list of cities on the

COMAND display from which you can se-

lect the desired city.

Sample dialog:

sSpell town

tPlease spell the town name

iIf the desired town/city does not appear on

the list of towns/cities, the town or city can be

entered by using the “Spell town” command.

iYou can scroll through the list by using the

“Continue” or “Back” command. Say “Correc-

tion” to enter the town or city again.

306

Control systems

sN-E-W-Y-O-R

uThe system displays a numbered

list of available city names

tPlease select a line number

sNumber one

tNumber one, town accepted

The city selected is adopted for route guid-

ance.

“District” or “Center”

Use the command “District” or “Center” to

to spell a city location in the city previously

selected.

Speak the characters as a continuous

string (five to seven characters). The sys-

tem then displays a list of available city dis-

tricts or centers on the COMAND display.

Select the desired city center from that

list.

Sample dialog:

sDistrict

tPlease spell the center

sS-T-A-T-E-N-I-S

uThe system displays a list of avail-

able districts if more than one name

matches the name of a district for

the given city

tPlease select a line number

sNumber one

tNumber one, center accepted

The district selected is adopted for route

guidance.

iYou can use the commands “Continue” or

“Back” to scroll up or down in the list. Use the

command “Correction” to start over again by

spelling the name of the town.

iYou must also spell foreign towns or cities in

English. Please note that the list on the COMAND

display is sorted according to the probability of

the voice recognition.

Speak each character as clearly as you can, es-

pecially when they sound very similar (d or e).

307

Control systems

Voice Control* navigation

“Street”

Use the command “Street” to spell and se-

lect a street for the adopted city. Only

street names available on the navigation

DVD can be selected.

Speak the characters as a continuous

string (five to seven characters). The sys-

tem then displays a list of available street

names on the COMAND display. Select the

desired street name from that list.

Sample dialog:

sStreet

tPlease spell the name of the street

sF-O-R-E-S-T

uThe system displays a numbered

list of available street names

tPlease select a line number

sNumber one

tNumber one, street accepted

The street name selected is adopted for

route guidance.

“Intersection”, “Cross street”

Use the command “Intersection” or “Cross

street” to spell and select an intersection.

Speak the characters as a continuous

string (five to seven characters). The sys-

tem then displays a list of available inter-

sections on the COMAND display. Select

the desired intersection from that list.

Sample dialog:

sIntersection

tPlease spell the first street name

sF-O-R-E-S-T

tPlease spell the name of the cross-

ing street

sD-U-D-L-E-Y

uThe system displays a numbered

list of available intersections on the

COMAND display

tPlease select a line number

sNumber one

tIntersection accepted

The intersection is adopted for route guid-

ance. If an address at the intersection is

recognized, the system asks if it is correct.

Say “Yes” or “No”.

“House number”

Use the command “House number” to se-

lect a house number for the street previ-

ously selected. Speak the house number in

single digits.

Sample dialog:

sHouse number

tPlease say the house number in sin-

gle digits

sThree two

tIs three two correct?

sOK

tHouse number accepted

The house number is adopted for route

guidance.

308

Control systems

Voice Control* address book

COMAND address book overview

The Voice Control System address book

function gives you the capability to store

names and associated phone numbers and

address information.

You can store up to 80 speaker-dependent

voice entries in the Voice Control System

address book.

Using these voice entries, you can dial a

phone number stored in address book or

start route guidance to an address stored

in the address book. Available commands

are dependent on the status of the address

book. The address book can be in one of

the following status:

앫Address book not open

앫Address book open

Operation with address book not open

(global)

The Voice Control System gives you the

following capabilities:

앫Store a name (컄page 294)

앫Dial a name (컄page 295)

앫Delete a name (컄page 296)

앫Navigate to an entry (컄page 303)

앫List address book (컄page 309)

앫List phone book of the address

(컄page 297)

앫List address book destination memory

(컄page 304)

앫Delete the address book (컄page 310)

앫Open the address book

Opening address book

왘Press !.

왘Speak the command “Address book”.

왘Press !.

왘Speak one of the address book com-

mands described below.

Operation with address book open

(local)

In addition to the capabilities listed when

the address book is not open, the address

book opened allows you to:

앫open an entry using the corresponding

voice entry

앫open any entry by spelling the name

Warning! G

Please devote your attention first and fore-

most to the traffic situation you are in.

Before your journey, please familiarize your-

self with the address book functions.

Only use the Voice Control System when

road and traffic conditions permit you to do

so. Otherwise you could be involved in an

accident in which you or others could be in-

jured.

309

Control systems

Voice Control* address book

왔왘Opening entry: Speak the command “Open entry”.

Operating and using address book

왘Press !.

왘Speak one of the following commands

depending on the address book status

(open or not open).

Available commands with the address

book not open

For a complete list of commands

(컄page 318).

“Help address book”

Use the command “Help address book” to

have the Voice Control System read out an

option list of all available commands for

the address book.

“Save name” (컄page 294)

“Dial name” (컄page 295)

“Call <voice name>” (컄page 296)

“Delete name” (address book)

Use the command “Delete name” to delete

a voice name from your address book.

Sample dialog:

sDelete name

tPlease say the name

sJohn Smith

tDo you want to delete John Smith?

sYes

tThe voice name is deleted

“Navigate to <voice entry>” (address

book) (컄page 303)

“List address book”

Use the command “List address book” to

have the system read out all available ad-

dress book entries and, if desired, select

an entry when it is being read.

310

Control systems

Voice Control* address book

Sample dialog:

sList address book

The system reads out all available address

book entries.

왘Selecting address book entry: When

the system reads the desired entry,

press !.

The entry is selected and shown on the

COMAND display.

왘Canceling the dialog: Press L.

You have canceled the dialog. The sys-

tem reads out “Cancel”.

“List phone book” and dialing a phone

number (컄page 297)

“List destination memory” (컄page 304)

“Delete address book”

Use the command “Delete address book”

to delete all or individual voice names of

the address book entries. Only the voice

name is deleted; the remaining data in the

entry are retained.

“Address book”

Use this command to open the address

book.

Available commands with the address

book open

“Help address book”

Use the command “Help address book” to

have the Voice Control System read out an

option list of all available commands for

the address book.

“Open <voice name>”

Use the command “Open <voice name>”

to open an entry in your address book that

has a voice name already assigned to it.

Sample dialog:

sOpen John Smith

uThe entry “John Smith” appears on

the COMAND display

“Select entry”

Use the command “Select entry” to open

an entry in your address book.

Sample dialog:

sSelect entry

tPlease say the name

sJohn Smith

uThe entry “John Smith” appears on

the COMAND display.

“Spell entry”

Use the command “Spell entry” to open an

address book entry by spelling the name.

Speak the name as a continuous string

(five to seven characters).

311

Control systems

Voice Control* address book

The system will display a list of possible

matches on the COMAND display from

which you can select the desired entry.

Sample dialog:

sSpell entry

tPlease spell the name

sS-M-I-T-H

uThe system displays a numbered

list of matching entries on the

COMAND display

tPlease select a line number

sNumber two

uThe system opens the entry associ-

ated with line number two on the

list

iYou can use the commands “Continue” or

“Back” to scroll up or down the next page. Use

the command “Correction” to exit the current

selection list and spell the name again.

312

Control systems

Voice Control* radio

Voice Control* radio Radio operation

The Voice Control System gives you the ca-

pability to:

앫Select a station

앫Seek a station

앫Select a specific frequency

앫Save up to 20 stations in your station

list

앫Select frequency band (FM or AM)

앫Select weatherband

앫Switch to satellite radio* (USA only)

앫Delete station (from station list)

앫List the station list

앫Delete the station list

To operate the radio using the Voice Con-

trol System, the Voice Control System

must be activated (컄page 289).

Selecting radio mode

왘Press !.

왘Speak the command “Radio”.

왘Press !.

왘Speak one of the radio commands.

The system switches to the last tuned

station in the selected band.

Radio commands

For a complete list of commands

(컄page 318).

“Help Radio”

Use the commands

앫“FM”

앫“AM”

앫“Weatherband”

to select the desired frequency band or

switch the radio to the weatherband.

Warning! G

Please devote your attention first and fore-

most to the traffic situation you are in.

Before your journey, please familiarize your-

self with the radio functions.

Only use the Voice Control System when

road and traffic conditions permit you to do

so. Otherwise you could be involved in an

accident in which you or others could be in-

jured.

313

Control systems

Voice Control* radio

왔“Sat Radio*” (USA only)

Use this command for switching on the

satellite radio*.

“Next station” or “Previous station”

The following commands are used to start

the station search and to tune in the next

station:

앫“Next station”

앫“Previous station”

Selecting frequency (FM, AM only)

You may, for example, select a frequency

in the FM band (87.9 to 107.9 Megahertz)

directly using a verbal command such as

“Ninety-five five”. The Voice Control Sys-

tem also recognizes the words “frequen-

cy”, “point” and “megahertz”. You may for

example use the command “Frequency

ninety-five point five”.

Sample dialog:

sNinety-five point five

The Voice Control System tunes the radio

to frequency FM 95.5.

“Save station” (List saved stations)

Use this command to save the set station

(AM and FM only) by name in your personal

station list. After using this command, the

Voice Control System will prompt you to

repeat the name two to four times before it

is saved in the station list. When repeating

the station name, make sure that you pro-

nounce it in the same manner as during the

first input. Otherwise the name cannot be

saved and the Voice Control System can-

cels the save procedure.

Sample dialog:

sSave station

tPlease say the station name

sSmooth Jazz

tPlease say the station name again

sSmooth Jazz

tThe station Smooth Jazz has been

saved

“Select station” (List saved stations)

Use the command “Select station” (AM

and FM only) to select a saved station

name from your station list.

Sample dialog:

sSelect station

tPlease say the station name

sSmooth Jazz

The Voice Control System tunes to the cor-

responding frequency.

iThe Voice Control System may recognize

names even if not saved in your voice. For opti-

mum performance, however, call up only names

you have saved yourself.

iYou can freely select the station name, for

example “Favorite station”.

314

Control systems

Voice Control* radio

“Station Smooth Jazz” (List saved sta-

tions)

Use this command (AM and FM only) to di-

rectly select a saved station name from

your station list.

Sample dialog:

sStation Smooth Jazz

The Voice Control System tunes to the cor-

responding station.

“List station list” and select station

from list

Use this command to list the entire station

list, or to select an entry from the station

list.

Sample dialog:

sList station list

The Voice Control System reads out the

entire list.

To select a station:

When the system reads the desired sta-

tion:

왘Press !.

왘Canceling the dialog: Press L.

The dialog is concluded. The system

confirms “Cancel”.

“Delete station” (List saved stations)

Use the command “Delete station” (AM

and FM only) to delete a station from your

personal station list.

Sample dialog:

sDelete station

tWhich station do you want to de-

lete?

sSmooth Jazz

tDo you want to delete Smooth Jazz?

sYes

tStation deleted

iIf the Voice Control System does not recog-

nize the station name you requested, please re-

fer to the section “List station list” (컄page 314).

By following the dialog, you can check and deter-

mine if the name is saved in the station list.

315

Control systems

Voice Control* radio

왔“Delete station list”

Use this command to delete the complete

station list or one or more stations from

the station list.

Sample dialog:

sDelete station list

tDo you want to delete all voice

names from the station list?

sYes

tAre you sure?

sYes

tAll voice names have been deleted

from the station list

The system deletes the complete station

list. The deletion of the station list cannot

be undone.

tNo

The system starts reading the station list.

When the system reads the station to be

deleted:

왘Press !.

The station to be deleted is selected.

The name of the selected station is

read out once more.

tDo you want to delete Smooth Jazz?

sYes

tStation deleted

The station is erased and the remaining

station entries are read out.

tNo

The system continues reading the station

list entry by entry.

316

Control systems

Voice Control* CD/DVD changer/MP3

Voice Control*

CD/DVD changer/MP3

Operation

The Voice Control System gives you the

ability to:

앫Select a CD/DVD/medium

앫Select a track

앫Select a folder in MP3 mode

앫Select a group in audio-DVD mode

To operate the DVD changer using the

Voice Control System, the Voice Control

System must be activated (컄page 289).

Selecting CD mode

왘Press !.

왘Speak one of the following commands:

앫“CD”

앫“DVD”

앫“MP3”

왘Press !.

왘Speak one of the following commands.

Commands

For a complete list of commands

(컄page 318).

“Help CD” or “Help DVD” “Help MP3”

Use the commands

앫“Help CD”

앫“Help DVD”

앫“Help MP3”

and the Voice Control System will read out

a complete list of available commands for

the CD, DVD or MP3.

“CD/DVD/Medium 1” to

“CD/DVD/Medium 6”

Use commands “CD/DVD/Medium 1” to

“CD/DVD/Medium 6” to select one of up

to 6 mediums in your DVD changer.

Warning! G

Please devote your attention first and fore-

most to the traffic situation you are in.

Before your journey, please familiarize your-

self with the audio functions.

Only use the Voice Control System when

road and traffic conditions permit you to do

so. Otherwise you could be involved in an

accident in which you or others could be in-

jured.

iThe following commands “Next/Previous

CD/DVD” and “CD/DVD 1” to “CD/DVD 6”,

cause the DVD changer to switch from one slot

to another, regardless of the type of medium

found in the selected slot. In your command, you

can therefore replace the term “CD/DVD” with

“Medium”.

317

Control systems

Voice Control* CD/DVD changer/MP3

“Next CD/DVD/Medium”

Use the command “Next CD/DVD/Medi-

um” to select the next available medium in

the DVD changer.

“Track 1” to “Track 39”

Use the commands “Track 1” to

“Track 39” to select one of up to 39 title

numbers of a loaded medium.

“Next track”

Use the command “Next track” to select

the next track.

“Previous track” or “Repeat track”

Use the command “Previous track” or “Re-

peat track” to play again the track you are

listening to.

“Group 1” to “Group 9”

The “Group 1” to “Group 9” commands are

used to select a group on the inserted au-

dio-DVD.

“Next group”/“Previous group”

The “Next group”/“Previous group” com-

mands are used to select a group on the in-

serted audio-DVD.

“Memory card”

The “Memory card” command is used to

switch from the DVD drive to the PCMCIA

card.

“Drive”

The “Drive” command is used to switch

from the PCMCIA card to the DVD drive.

318

Control systems

Voice Control* command list

Command list

Chapter “Command list” gives you on over-

view of all commands available for use to

control the Voice Control System.

Which commands are available for use is

dependent on the equipment level in your

vehicle.

General commands

iSome functions can be operated using sev-

eral different commands. In the following list,

these commands are grouped in one cell.

Choose your preferred command from those

available.

앫yes

앫right

앫ok

앫cancel

앫stop

앫quit

앫abort

앫terminate

앫no

앫no thank you

앫address book

앫MP3

앫CD

앫navigation

앫route guidance

앫audio DVD

앫radio

앫sat radio*

앫satellite radio*

앫telephone

앫messages

앫SMS

앫vehicle

앫correction

앫wrong

앫incorrect

앫help

앫help please

앫please help

앫help functions

앫help devices

앫help voice control

앫linguatronic help

앫general help

앫help permanent commands

319

Control systems

Voice Control* command list

Telephone* commands

앫help global commands

앫letters of the English alphabet

앫digits 0 - 9

앫continue

앫go forward

앫next page

앫back

앫go back

앫previous page

앫help radio

앫help tuner

앫radio help

앫tuner help

앫help telephone

앫help phone

앫help address book

앫help CD

앫help disc

앫help CD player

앫help CD changer

앫help audio DVD

앫help DVDA

앫help DVD audio

앫help DVD audio player

앫help DVD audio changer

앫help navigation

앫help nav

앫help navi

앫help route guidance

앫help routing

앫help destination guidance

앫telephone (on)

앫phone (on)

앫telephone off

앫save

앫save PIN

앫save PIN code

앫save number

앫save PIN number

앫save telephone number

앫save name

앫save password

앫store PIN

앫store PIN code

앫store number

앫store PIN number

320

Control systems

Voice Control* command list

앫store telephone number

앫store name

앫store password

앫dial

앫dial PIN

앫dial number

앫dial PIN number

앫dial PIN code

앫dial phone number

앫dial telephone number

앫dial password

앫dial unlock code

앫confirm

앫confirm PIN

앫confirm number

앫confirm PIN number

앫confirm PIN code

앫confirm phone number

앫confirm telephone number

앫confirm password

앫confirm unlock code

앫repeat PIN

앫repeat number

앫repeat PIN number

앫repeat PIN code

앫repeat phone number

앫repeat telephone number

앫repeat password

앫repeat unlock code

앫enter PIN

앫enter PIN code

앫enter PIN number

앫enter code

앫enter unlock code

앫list phone book

앫read out phone book

앫play phone book

앫get phone book

앫recall phone book

앫redial

앫redial last number

앫redial last phone number

앫correction

앫wrong PIN

앫wrong number

앫wrong PIN number

앫wrong PIN code

앫wrong phone number

앫wrong telephone number

앫wrong unlock code

앫incorrect PIN

앫incorrect number

앫incorrect PIN number

앫incorrect PIN code

321

Control systems

Voice Control* command list

Navigation commands

앫incorrect phone number

앫incorrect telephone number

앫incorrect unlock code

앫delete

앫delete PIN

앫delete number

앫delete PIN number

앫delete PIN code

앫delete phone number

앫delete telephone number

앫delete unlock code

앫navigation

앫nav

앫navi

앫route guidance

앫routing

앫destination guidance

앫guidance instructions on

앫switch guidance instruction on

앫switch guidance instructions on

앫switch route guidance instruction on

앫switch route guidance instructions on

앫switch on guidance instruction

앫switch on guidance instructions

앫switch on route guidance instruction

앫switch on route guidance instructions

앫guidance instructions off

앫switch guidance instructions off

앫switch route guidance instructions off

앫switch off guidance instructions

앫switch off route guidance instructions

앫mute guidance instructions

앫mute route guidance instructions

앫house number

앫enter house number

앫map (on)

앫show map

앫switch on map

앫zoom in

앫zoom in on map

앫zoom out

앫zoom out on map

앫zoom in completely

앫zoom out completely

앫enter country

앫enter another country

앫spell country

앫spell another country

앫change country

앫change another country

앫intersection

앫spell intersection

322

Control systems

Voice Control* command list

앫spell cross street

앫enter intersection

앫enter cross street

앫last destinations

앫last states

앫last provinces

앫spell town

앫spell city

앫spell name of town

앫spell name of city

앫enter town

앫enter city

앫enter name of town

앫enter name of city

앫district

앫center

앫spell district

앫spell center

앫enter district

앫enter center

앫points of interest

앫enter points of interest

앫enter point of interest

앫enter POI

앫enter POIs

앫street

앫spell street

앫spell name of street

앫enter street

앫enter name of street

앫enter destination

앫destination entry

앫destination input

앫address entry

앫address input

앫save destination

앫save address

앫store destination

앫store address

앫start route guidance

앫start navigation

앫start nav

앫start routing

앫begin route guidance

앫begin navigation

앫begin route guidance

앫begin routing

앫continue route guidance

앫continue navigation

앫continue nav

앫continue routing

앫destination guidance on

앫cancel route guidance

앫cancel navigation

323

Control systems

Voice Control* command list

Address book commands

앫cancel nav

앫cancel routing

앫cancel destination guidance

앫exit route guidance

앫exit navigation

앫exit nav

앫exit routing

앫exit destination guidance

앫terminate route guidance

앫terminate navigation

앫terminate nav

앫terminate routing

앫terminate destination guidance

앫next gas station

앫next Mercedes-Benz service

앫next workshop

앫next MB service

앫next MB service point

앫next MB service center

앫next Mercedes service

앫next Mercedes service point

앫next Mercedes service center

앫next Mercedes-Benz service point

앫next Mercedes-Benz service center

앫next service point

앫next service center

앫next hospital

앫next parking lot

앫next restaurant

앫address book (on)

앫address list (on)

앫addresses (on)

앫list address book

앫read out address book

앫get address book

앫recall address book

앫delete address book

앫spell entry

앫spell name

앫spell heading

앫search entry

앫search name

앫search heading

앫open entry

앫show entry

앫list entry

앫select entry

앫get entry

앫open entry

앫open page

앫open item

앫open name

324

Control systems

Voice Control* command list

앫open <voice name>

앫delete name

앫delete <voice name>

앫list destination memory

앫read out destination memory

앫play destination memory

앫get destination memory

앫recall destination memory

앫<voice name>

앫<voice name> car

앫<voice name> car phone

앫<voice name> land line

앫<voice name> phone

앫<voice name> telephone

앫<voice name> cell phone

앫<voice name> mobile phone

앫<voice name> cellular phone

앫call <voice name>

앫call <voice name> work

앫call <voice name> office

앫call <voice name> business

앫call <voice name> company

앫<voice name> home

앫call <voice name> home

앫work

앫office

앫business

앫company

앫car

앫car phone

앫land line

앫land line phone

앫land line telephone

앫cell phone

앫mobile phone

앫cellular phone

앫work car (phone)

앫office car (phone)

앫business car (phone)

앫company car (phone)

앫car (phone) work

앫car (phone) office

앫car (phone) business

앫car (phone) company

앫work land line

앫office phone

앫land line phone business

앫land line telephone company

앫work cell phone

앫office mobile phone

앫business cellular phone

앫cell phone company

앫home

앫home car

325

Control systems

Voice Control* command list

Audio commands

앫home car phone

앫car home

앫car phone home

앫home land line

앫home land line phone

앫land line home

앫land line phone home

앫home cell phone

앫home mobile

앫cell home

앫cell phone home

앫mobile home

앫mobile phone home

앫cellular home

앫cellular phone home

앫call <voice name> work car

앫call <voice name> work land line

앫call <voice name> work cell phone

앫call <voice name> home car

앫call <voice name> land line phone

앫call <voice name> cell phone home

앫navigate to <voice name>

앫drive to <voice name>

앫navigate to <voice name> work

앫navigate to <voice name> home

앫dial name

앫dial voice name

앫save name

앫save voice name

앫save number

앫save telephone number

앫store voice name

앫store number

앫store telephone number

앫accept

앫accept PIN

앫accept PIN code

앫accept lock code

앫accept PIN number

앫accept number

앫accept telephone number

앫accept name

앫accept password

앫OK

앫finished

앫<1> - <8>

앫use <1> - <8>

앫number <1> - <8>

앫line <1> - <8>

앫audio

앫audio off

326

Control systems

Voice Control* command list

Radio

Example: 95.5 FM

Example: 540 AM

Satellite radio* (USA only)

앫radio (on)

앫AM

앫MW

앫FM

앫weatherband

앫next station

앫station search

앫going up

앫other station

앫radio seek

앫station <voice entry>

앫go to <voice entry>

앫<voice entry>

앫delete station

앫save station

앫store station

앫select station

앫select channel

앫list station list

앫list saved stations

앫read out station list

앫play station list

앫get station list

앫recall station list

앫delete station list

앫previous station

앫last station

앫coming down

앫station search coming down

앫ninety-five five

앫ninety-five five megahertz

앫ninety-five point five

앫ninety-five point five megahertz

앫frequency ninety-five five

앫frequency ninety-five point five

앫frequency ninety-five five megahertz

앫frequency ninety-five point five mega-

hertz

앫five-hundred-forty

앫five-hundred-forty kilohertz

앫frequency five-hundred-forty

앫frequency five-hundred-forty kilohertz

앫sat radio*

앫satellite radio*

327

Control systems

Voice Control* command list

왔CD

MP3

앫CD (on)

앫CD player (on)

앫CD changer (on)

앫next CD

앫other CD

앫next medium

앫other medium

앫previous CD

앫last CD

앫preceding CD

앫replay CD

앫replay medium

앫repeat medium

앫last medium

앫previous medium

앫next track

앫other track

앫previous track

앫last track

앫repeat track

앫replay track

앫track 1-39

앫load track 1-39

앫load track number 1-39

앫select track 1-39

앫select track number 1-39

앫CD 1-6

앫CD number 1-6

앫medium 1-6

앫medium number 1-6

앫MP3 (on)

앫MP3 player (on)

앫MP3 changer (on)

앫next MP3

앫other MP3

앫next medium

앫other medium

앫previous MP3

앫last MP3

앫preceding MP3

앫replay MP3

앫replay medium

앫repeat medium

앫last medium

앫previous medium

앫next directory

앫other directory

328

Control systems

Voice Control* command list

DVD

앫next folder

앫other folder

앫previous directory

앫previous folder

앫last directory

앫last folder

앫repeat directory

앫repeat folder

앫next track

앫other track

앫previous track

앫last track

앫repeat track

앫replay track

앫track 1-39

앫load track 1-39

앫load track number 1-39

앫select track 1-39

앫select track number 1-39

앫MP3 1-6

앫MP3 number 1-6

앫medium 1-6

앫medium number 1-6

앫drive

앫memory card

앫audio DVD

앫DVDA player (on)

앫audio DVD player (on)

앫DVD audio player (on)

앫DVDA changer (on)

앫audio DVD changer (on)

앫DVD audio changer (on)

앫next DVDA

앫other DVDA

앫next DVD audio

앫other DVD audio

앫next audio DVD

앫other audio DVD

앫next medium

앫other medium

앫previous DVDA

앫last DVDA

앫preceding DVDA

앫replay DVDA

앫previous DVD audio

앫last DVD audio

앫preceding DVD audio

앫replay DVD audio

앫previous audio DVD

앫last audio DVD

앫preceding audio DVD

앫replay audio DVD

329

Control systems

Voice Control* command list

앫replay medium

앫repeat medium

앫last medium

앫previous medium

앫next directory

앫other directory

앫next folder

앫other folder

앫previous directory

앫previous folder

앫last directory

앫last folder

앫repeat directory

앫repeat folder

앫next group

앫other group

앫previous group

앫previous repeat group

앫previous replay group

앫last group

앫last repeat group

앫last replay group

앫group 1-9

앫select group 1-9

앫group number 1-9

앫select group number 1-9

앫next track

앫other track

앫previous track

앫last track

앫repeat track

앫replay track

앫track 1-39

앫load track 1-39

앫load track number 1-39

앫select track 1-39

앫select track number 1-39

앫DVDA 1-6

앫DVDA number 1-6

앫DVD audio 1-6

앫DVD audio number 1-6

앫audio DVD 1-6

앫audio DVD number 1-6

앫medium 1-6

앫medium number 1-6

330

Control systems

Voice Control* troubleshooting

Help function

To support the user, the Voice Control Sys-

tem contains an extensive help function.

The help function gives you:

앫General hints on how to best use the

Voice Control System

앫A listing of all available commands

Help commands

“Help voice control”

Using the command “Help voice control”

will give you information on how to best

use the Voice Control System.

“Help”

In a main menu, help can be accessed at

any time by saying the command “Help”.

The Voice Control System will then read

out the available functions and commands

of all systems.

In a submenu, help can also be accessed at

any time by saying the command “Help”.

The Voice Control System will then read

out an option list of all available functions

and commands available in the particular

submenu.

You can also use the help function to ac-

cess help for a specific system. To access

help for the phone operation, you would

speak the command “Help Telephone”.

If you wish to execute the last command

read out:

왘Press !.

Help window

You can use the help window to view a se-

lection of valid commands on the

COMAND display.

The help functions can be switched on or

off via COMAND in the “System settings”

menu (컄page 239).

Entering digits and spelling

Entering digits

앫Digits from “Zero” to “Nine” may be

used.

앫Speaking phone numbers in digit

blocks of 3 to 5 digits has proven a

very reliable method for the input of

phone numbers.

Spelling

앫The letters of the English alphabet and

the digits 0 - 9 may be used.

앫Speak the letters in blocks of 5 - 7 let-

ters at a time.

앫Speak each individual letter clearly.

331

Control systems

What to do if ...

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution

Voice Control System does not recognize a

station list entry.

The voice entries for the station names

sound too similar.

왘When you create your address book en-

tries, select names with the greatest

possible acoustic differences.

왘Speak the command “List station list”.

The system reads out the station list en-

try by entry.

왘Press ! when the desired station

name is being read out.

The station is selected (컄page 314).

Should interference occur during the pro-

cess of storing a name, the Voice Control

System prompts you to repeat your voice

entry a third and fourth time. If the interfer-

ence continues, the dialog is stopped.

Both voice entries differ. 왘Pronounce the voice entries both times

in the same manner.

332

Control systems

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution

Voice Control System does not recognize

commands.

You have not operated the system from the

driver’s seat.

왘Operate the Voice Control System only

by the driver as the microphone is

geared to the driver side.

You have spoken unclearly, too loudly or

too quietly.

왘Speak the commands in a continuous

manner using a normal tone.

A blower is set to the highest setting, vents

are pointed at microphones or wind noise is

being created through open windows.

왘Avoid loud disturbances.

Voice Control System does not recognize a

address book entry.

The voice entries in the address book sound

too similar.

왘When you create your address book en-

tries, select names with the greatest

possible acoustic differences: If for ex-

ample you have the names Smith and

Schmidt, choose for example “Smith

work” or “Schmidt John”.

왘Speak the command “List phone book”.

The system reads out the address book

entry by entry.

왘Press ! when the desired entry is

being read out.

The entry is selected and the corre-

sponding number is dialed

(컄page 297).

333

Control systems

Voice Control* individualization

The individualization is used to adapt the

Voice Control System to your own voice

and to therefore improve speech recogni-

tion. This does not affect the speech rec-

ognition of other users.

Individualization consists of two stages:

앫Digits

앫Commands

You can activate individualization in the

COMAND system settings (컄page 239).

A dialog and screen displays will guide you

through the individualization process.

The system can be reset to the factory set-

tings at any time.

iThe individualization can only be performed

when the vehicle is stationary.

If you drive off, the individualization will be can-

celed.

After starting the session, the system will guide

you through the individualization by means of

acoustic instructions.

iYou may wish to complete only a portion of

the individualization process.

Completing the digits portion alone may result in

an improved recognition rate.

Individualization can be exited at any time. The

data trained, however, will only be retained if a

given individualization portion is completed and

the data is stored when prompted to do so by the

system.

Error: This Masterpage should never be used!

Continental Automotive Systems UHI-5100 Bluetooth Handsfree Car Kit with HFP User Manual

Continental Automotive Systems, Inc. Bluetooth Handsfree Car Kit with HFP

User Manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation